NEC NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual (1)

NEC NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual (1)
ND-70928 (E)
ISSUE 1
STOCK # 151998
®
Installation Procedure Manual
JANUARY, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications,
functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its
employees and customers. The information contained herein is
the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc.
NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
MATWorX is a trademark of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in U.S.A.
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
1
21
1
ii
1
22
1
iii
1
23
1
iv
1
24
1
v
1
25
1
vi
1
26
1
vii
1
27
1
viii
1
28
1
ix
1
29
1
x
1
30
1
xi
1
31
1
xii
1
32
1
xiii
1
33
1
xiv
1
34
1
xv
1
35
1
xvi
1
36
1
xvii
1
37
1
xviii
1
38
1
1
1
39
1
2
1
40
1
3
1
41
1
4
1
42
1
5
1
43
1
6
1
44
1
7
1
45
1
8
1
46
1
9
1
47
1
10
1
48
1
11
1
49
1
12
1
50
1
13
1
51
1
14
1
52
1
15
1
53
1
16
1
54
1
17
1
55
1
18
1
56
1
19
1
57
1
1
58
1
i
20
ISSUE 1
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 2
DATE
ISSUE 5
DATE
3
4
ISSUE 3
DATE
ISSUE 6
DATE
2
6
7
8
ISSUE 4
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
5
ISSUE 8
DATE
IVS2
NEAX2000
Installation Procedure Manual
Revision Sheet 1/6
ND-70928 (E)
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
59
1
97
1
60
1
98
1
61
1
99
1
62
1
100
1
63
1
101
1
64
1
102
1
65
1
103
1
66
1
104
1
67
1
105
1
68
1
106
1
69
1
107
1
70
1
108
1
71
1
109
1
72
1
110
1
73
1
111
1
74
1
112
1
75
1
113
1
76
1
114
1
77
1
115
1
78
1
116
1
79
1
117
1
80
1
118
1
81
1
119
1
82
1
120
1
83
1
121
1
84
1
122
1
85
1
123
1
86
1
124
1
87
1
125
1
88
1
126
1
89
1
127
1
90
1
128
1
91
1
129
1
92
1
130
1
93
1
131
1
94
1
132
1
95
1
133
1
96
1
134
1
ISSUE 1
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 2
DATE
ISSUE 5
DATE
3
4
ISSUE 3
DATE
ISSUE 6
DATE
2
6
7
8
ISSUE 4
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
5
ISSUE 8
DATE
IVS2
NEAX2000
Installation Procedure Manual
Revision Sheet 2/6
ND-70928 (E)
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
135
1
173
1
136
1
174
1
137
1
175
1
138
1
176
1
139
1
177
1
140
1
178
1
141
1
179
1
142
1
180
1
143
1
181
1
144
1
182
1
145
1
183
1
146
1
184
1
147
1
185
1
148
1
186
1
149
1
187
1
150
1
188
1
151
1
189
1
152
1
190
1
153
1
191
1
154
1
192
1
155
1
193
1
156
1
194
1
157
1
195
1
158
1
196
1
159
1
197
1
160
1
198
1
161
1
199
1
162
1
200
1
163
1
201
1
164
1
202
1
165
1
203
1
166
1
204
1
167
1
205
1
168
1
206
1
169
1
207
1
170
1
208
1
171
1
209
1
172
1
210
1
ISSUE 1
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 2
DATE
ISSUE 5
DATE
3
4
ISSUE 3
DATE
ISSUE 6
DATE
2
6
7
8
ISSUE 4
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
5
ISSUE 8
DATE
IVS2
NEAX2000
Installation Procedure Manual
Revision Sheet 3/6
ND-70928 (E)
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
211
1
249
1
212
1
250
1
213
1
251
1
214
1
252
1
215
1
253
1
216
1
254
1
217
1
255
1
218
1
256
1
219
1
257
1
220
1
258
1
221
1
259
1
222
1
260
1
223
1
261
1
224
1
262
1
225
1
263
1
226
1
264
1
227
1
265
1
228
1
266
1
229
1
267
1
230
1
268
1
231
1
269
1
232
1
270
1
233
1
271
1
234
1
272
1
235
1
273
1
236
1
274
1
237
1
275
1
238
1
276
1
239
1
277
1
240
1
278
1
241
1
279
1
242
1
280
1
243
1
281
1
244
1
282
1
245
1
283
1
246
1
284
1
247
1
285
1
248
1
286
1
ISSUE 1
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 2
DATE
ISSUE 5
DATE
3
4
ISSUE 3
DATE
ISSUE 6
DATE
2
6
7
8
ISSUE 4
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
5
ISSUE 8
DATE
IVS2
NEAX2000
Installation Procedure Manual
Revision Sheet 4/6
ND-70928 (E)
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
287
1
325
1
288
1
326
1
289
1
327
1
290
1
328
1
291
1
329
1
292
1
330
1
293
1
331
1
294
1
332
1
295
1
333
1
296
1
334
1
297
1
335
1
298
1
336
1
299
1
337
1
300
1
338
1
301
1
339
1
302
1
340
1
303
1
341
1
304
1
342
1
305
1
343
1
306
1
344
1
307
1
345
1
308
1
346
1
309
1
347
1
310
1
348
1
311
1
349
1
312
1
350
1
313
1
351
1
314
1
352
1
315
1
353
1
316
1
354
1
317
1
355
1
318
1
356
1
319
1
357
1
320
1
358
1
321
1
359
1
322
1
360
1
323
1
361
1
324
1
362
1
ISSUE 1
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
ISSUE 2
DATE
ISSUE 5
DATE
3
4
ISSUE 3
DATE
ISSUE 6
DATE
2
6
7
8
ISSUE 4
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
5
ISSUE 8
DATE
IVS2
NEAX2000
Installation Procedure Manual
Revision Sheet 5/6
ND-70928 (E)
ISSUE No.
ISSUE No.
PAGE No.
PAGE No.
1
363
1
364
1
365
1
366
1
367
1
368
1
369
1
370
1
371
1
372
1
373
1
374
1
375
1
376
1
377
1
378
1
379
1
380
1
381
1
382
1
383
1
384
1
385
1
386
1
387
1
388
1
389
1
390
1
2
3
4
ISSUE 1
DATE
JANUARY, 2000
6
7
8
1
ISSUE 2
DATE
ISSUE 5
DATE
5
3
4
ISSUE 3
DATE
ISSUE 6
DATE
2
6
7
8
ISSUE 4
DATE
ISSUE 7
DATE
5
ISSUE 8
DATE
IVS2
NEAX2000
Installation Procedure Manual
Revision Sheet 6/6
ND-70928 (E)
NEAX2000 IVS2
Installation Procedure Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
REGULATORY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFERENCE MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
5
TRUNKING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Floor Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Wall Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Module/Installation Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Application Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Line/Trunk Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Circuit Card Mounting Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Control Card Mounting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Electricity Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Power OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stationary Equipment (For North America/Australia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Equipment (For North America/Australia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
38
38
39
41
43
44
45
47
47
47
49
50
Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Using AC CORD-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Installation Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wall Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUS Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER CABLE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of AC CORD-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking for Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat Run Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BATTERY CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Battery Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External / BATTM Battery Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of External MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Running to External MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Connection to MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of Each LEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDF Cross Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DID Trunk (AUC/DIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SN716 DESKCON (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External TAS Indicator (DK/MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Transfer (AUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Display Panel (MP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-in SMDR (MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page ii
50
52
54
54
72
75
82
83
84
85
90
90
91
92
92
94
96
99
102
102
103
106
109
109
110
113
122
128
129
130
135
137
144
146
148
158
168
169
172
175
180
182
185
190
191
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resident System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cofirming Lamp Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM DATA SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 3
194
199
201
201
201
202
202
203
203
204
205
205
205
205
LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-CP14 (MP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-CP15 (FP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-AP00-A (DBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-AP00-B (AP00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-AP01 (AP01). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-BRTA (BRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2BRTC (BRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-CC01 (ETHER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DAIA (DAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DAIB (DAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DAIC (DAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DAID (DAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DAIE (DAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DAIF (DAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-24DTA-C (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-30DTC-A (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-IPTA (IPT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-24PRTA (PRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4RSTB (MFR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4RSTC (CIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-SC00 (CCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-SC01 (DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-SC03 (ICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
208
209
210
215
217
219
222
224
226
229
235
238
243
248
252
257
261
264
270
274
278
284
290
294
300
302
304
307
310
Page iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
PN-SC03-A (CSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-M542 (CONN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-M557 (CONN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE/TRUNK CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2AMPA (AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-AUCA (AUC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-CFTA (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2COTD (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4COTA-A (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4COTB (COT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4COTE (COT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4COTF (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4COTG (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-6COTJ (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8COTQ (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8COTR (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8COTS (COT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8COTT (COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2CSIA (CSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4DATC (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2DITA (DIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4DITB (DIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-DK00 (DK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2DLCC (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4DLCF (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4DLCM (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4DLCQ (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8DLCL (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8DLCP (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2DPCB (DPC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2ILCA (ILC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCC (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCD-A (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCE (LC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCF (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCK (LC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCL (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCV (LC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4LCW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8LCAA (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2LDTA (LDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page iv
312
314
317
319
321
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
342
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
360
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
PN-M03 (M03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-M10 (M10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2ODTA (ODT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-2ODTB (ODT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-8RSTA (PBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-TNTA (TNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN-4VCTH (VCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-8PFTB (PFT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-VM00-M (VM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PZ-VM01 (VM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
373
376
378
379
380
381
383
385
386
389
Page v
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Title
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Figure 1-8
Figure 1-9
Figure 1-10
Figure 1-11
Figure 1-12
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-24
Figure 2-25
Figure 2-26
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
Figure 2-29
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Maximum Configuration for Floor Standing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-PIM Configuration for Wall-Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1-PIM Configuration for 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Circuit Card Mounting Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MP/FP Card Mounting Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (PIM1-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (PIM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (PIM1-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Static Electricity Guard (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Static Electricity Guard (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Procedure Flowchart (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Procedure Flowchart (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Wiring AC CORD to Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
AC CORD Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Wiring Installation Cable to Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Floor Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cable Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Floor Marking for BASE PLATE (for Fixed Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Floor Marking for BASE TRAY (for Stationary Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Drilling Instructions for Anchor Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Connection of PIM and BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Placing PIM on BASE TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Connection of BUILD PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connection of FRONT STOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Connection of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Detaching SIDE COVER (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Detaching SIDE PANEL (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Mounting PIM to 19-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Mounting Multiple-PIM to 19-inch RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
BUS Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Cable Connection on PZ-PW121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Connection of AC CORD-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Cable Connection between PZ-PW121 and BWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Mounting PZ-PW122 into PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Page vi
Page
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Title
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-33
Figure 2-34
Figure 2-35
Figure 2-36
Figure 2-37
Figure 2-37
Figure 2-38
Figure 2-39
Figure 2-40
Figure 2-41
Figure 2-42
Figure 2-43
Figure 2-44
Figure 2-45
Figure 2-45
Figure 2-46
Figure 2-47
Figure 2-48
Figure 2-49
Figure 2-49
Figure 2-50
Figure 2-50
Figure 2-51
Figure 2-52
Figure 2-53
Figure 2-54
Figure 2-55
Figure 2-56
Figure 2-57
Figure 2-58
Figure 2-58
Figure 2-59
Figure 2-60
Figure 2-61
Figure 2-62
Figure 2-63
Figure 2-64
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-65
Figure 2-66
Figure 2-67
Figure 2-68
Figure 2-69
Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW122 and BWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
PWR CA-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Connection of PWR CA-A Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Connection of PWR CA-A Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Confirming Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Internal Battery Mounting (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Internal Battery Mounting (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Internal Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Battery Mounting into BATTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Battery Mounted into BATTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
External/BATTM Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
MDF Cable Hole Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
MDF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Making Cable Hole on PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Cable Running to the External MDF (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cable Running to the External MDF (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Card Slots and the LTC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
MDF Cross Connection for C.O. Trunk Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
MDF Cross Connection for LD Trunk Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MDF Cross Connection for 2 Line DID Trunk Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
MDF Cross Connection for 4 Line DID Trunk Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
DTI Cable Connection via MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
MDF Cross Connection for DTI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
DTI Cable Connection via CONN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Coaxial Cable Connection for DTI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Standard Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Long Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Standard Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Long Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option) . . . . . . . . . 148
MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON (AC Adapter Power Option) . . . . . . . . 149
Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Headset Installation for SN716 DESKCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
AC-DC ADAPTER Connection to SN716 DESKCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
PN-PW00 Card Connection to the SN716 DESKCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page
Page vii
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure
Title
Figure 2-70
Figure 2-71
Figure 2-71
Figure 2-72
Figure 2-73
Figure 2-74
Figure 2-75
Figure 2-75
Figure 2-76
Figure 2-77
Figure 2-78
Figure 2-79
Figure 2-80
Figure 2-81
Figure 2-82
Figure 2-82
Figure 2-83
Figure 2-84
Figure 2-85
Figure 2-85
Figure 2-86
Figure 2-87
Figure 2-88
Figure 2-89
Figure 2-90
Figure 2-90
Figure 2-91
Figure 2-92
Figure 2-93
Figure 2-94
Figure 2-94
Figure 2-95
Figure 2-96
Figure 2-97
Figure 2-98
MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Standard Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Long Line) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Long Line) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712 ATTCON (Standard Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712 ATTCON (Long Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Jack Set Installation for SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Switch Setting on the SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Switch Setting on the SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cable Connection to SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Mounting of Handset Support to SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MDF Cross Connection for Day/Night Mode Change by External Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
External TAS Indicator Connection Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Paging Equipment Connection Outline (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Paging Equipment Connection Outline (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
MDF Cross Connection for Paging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Connection Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (1 of 2) . . 177
MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (2 of 2) . . 178
Connecting External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Supplied with D.C. . . . . . 179
External BGM Sources Connection Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
MDF Cross Connection for External BGM Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
PFT Connection Outline (AUC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
MDF Cross Connection for PFT (AUC) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
MDF Cross Connection for PFT (AUC) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
PFT Connection Outline (8PFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Connection of 25-Pair Cable and PZ-8PFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
PFT Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
MDF Cross Connection for PFT (8PFT) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
MDF Cross Connection for PFT (8PFT) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
MDF Cross Connection for Alarm Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
SMDR Terminal Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
SMDR Terminal Connection via MODEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
RS NORM-4 CA-A/RS NORM-4S CA-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Printer Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Printer Connection via MODEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Mounting of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Installation of the CARD STOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 2-99
Figure 2-100
Figure 2-101
Figure 2-102
Figure 2-103
Figure 2-104
Figure 2-105
Figure 2-106
Page viii
Page
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
LIST OF TABLES
Table
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Table 1-5
Table 1-6
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Title
Page
Module Name and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation Hardware Name and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Control Card Name and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Application Processor Card Name and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Line/Trunk Card Name and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Line Conditions of Each Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
MDF Cables for each PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
LTC Connector Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Peripheral Equipment and Card List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
RS-232C Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
List of Control Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
List of Application Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
List of Line/Trunk Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page ix
This page is for your notes.
Page x
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Regulatory Requirements
REGULATORY INFORMATION
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit the PBX to
be directly connected to the telephone network. A jack is provided on party lines or coin lines.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. If such
changes affect the compatibility or use of the PBX, the telephone company must provide adequate notice of the changes.
This equipment complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A computing
device. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference
to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct
this interference.
FCC PART 15 REQUIREMENTS
In compliance with FCC Part 15 Rules, the following statement is provided:
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his
own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page xi
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Part 68 Registration
FCC PART 68 REGISTRATION
Company Notification
Before installing the PBX to the telephone network, the telephone company must be provided
with the following:
• Your telephone number
• The FCC registration numbers:
JAPAN
USA
PBX
AY5JPN-20542-PF-E
AY5USA-21582-PF-E
Hybrid
AY5JPN-20543-MF-E
AY5USA-21583-MF-E
Key system
AY5JPN-20586-KF-E
AY5USA-21584-KF-E
The Ringer Equivalence Number is 1.6B; the required USOC jacks are RJ21X, RJ2EX, RJ2GX,
and RJ49C.
NOTE:
Limitations on features exist if the system is registered as a KF system. Refer to Features and Specifications for details.
Service Requirements
In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs will be performed by NEC or an authorized distributor of NEC. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to
NEC or to one of their authorized distributors.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact NEC America, Inc., at 800-TEAM
NEC (800-832-6632) for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the
telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the
network until the problem is resolved.
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company
Page xii
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Part 68 Registration
will provide advance notice so that you can make necessary modifications in order to maintain
uninterrupted service.
NO REPAIRS CAN BE DONE BY THE CUSTOMER.
Location of FCC Compliance Labels
Labels stating the NEAX2000 IVS2 FCC registration number and compliance with FCC Parts 15
and 68 are attached on the inside of the system’s front cover. Label examples are as follows:
“This equipment complies with the requirements in
Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A computing device.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area may
cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take whatever steps
are necessary to correct the interference.”
NEAX2000 IVS2
Complies With Part 68 FCC Rules
FCC Registration Numbers :
Ringer Equivalence : 1.6B
NEC America, Inc.
MADE IN USA
FCC Requirements for Private Line Operations
In order to connect this system to the private line network, provide the telephone company with:
• The quantities and USOC numbers of the required jacks (See the following table.)
• The sequence in which the trunks are to be connected
• The facility interface codes by position
• The Ringer Equivalence Number or service order code, as applicable, by position
Mfg’s Port ID
Facility Interface Code
Network Jacks
Service Order Code
PN-4COTB
PN-4COTB
PN-4COTG
PN-4COTG
PN-AUCA
PN-4DITB
PZ-8PFTA
PN-8COTQ
PN-8COTS
PN-8COTS
PN-AUCA
PN-20DTA
PN-20DTA
02LS2
02GS2
02LS2
02ES2
02RV2-T
02RV2-T
02LS2
02LS2
02LS2
02GS2
0L13A,0L13B,0L13C
TL11M
TL31M
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ2EX
RJ2GX
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page xiii
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Part 68 Registration
Mfg’s Port ID
Facility Interface Code
Network Jacks
Service Order Code
PN-24DTA
PN-24DTA
PN-24DTA
PN-24DTA
PN-24DTA
PN-BRTA
PN-DAIA
PN-DAIA
PN-DAIA
PN-DAIA
PN-DAIA
PN-DAIA
PN-DAIB
PN-DAIB
PN-DAIB
PN-DAIB
PN-DAIB
PN-24PRT-A
PN-24PRT-A
PN-24PRT-A
PN-24PRT-A
PN-24PRT-A
PN-24CCT-A
PN-24CCT-A
PN-24CCT-A
PN-24CCT-A
PN-24CCT-A
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-2BRTC
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
02IS5
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
04DU9-BN
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
05DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
02IS5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
RJ49C
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0Y
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0N
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0Y
Page xiv
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Direct-Inward Dialing (DID) Calls
DIRECT-INWARD DIALING (DID) CALLS
Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper answer supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC’s rules.
PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS WHEN:
(a) This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are:
• Answered by the called station
• Answered by the attendant
• Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user
• Routed to a dial prompt
(b) This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN.
Permissible exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered
• A busy tone is received
• A reorder tone is received
EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services
through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
CAUTION
The act of monitoring or recording telephone conversations under certain circumstances may
violate federal or state statutes. Consultation with your legal counsel prior to engaging in such
practices would be advisable.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page xv
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Regulatory Information on Single-Line Analog Telephones
REGULATORY INFORMATION ON SINGLE-LINE
ANALOG TELEPHONES
NEC single-line telephones comply with Part 68 of FCC Rules. On the bottom of the equipment
is a label that states, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for the equipment. If requested, this information should be provided to the
telephone company.
The equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
The equipment should be used only behind a PBX or KTS. The REN is used to determine the
number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not
all, areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
The Dterm terminals provided for the NEAX2000 IVS2 are hearing aid compatible. FCC rules prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
NEC-type single-line telephone sets used in conjunction with the NEAX2000 IVS2 are hearing
aid compatible. If other than NEC-type single-line telephone sets are to be used with this system,
ensure that these are hearing aid compatible.
INDUSTRY CANADA CS-03
Certification number: 140 5976 A
Load Number of the equipment: 1.0
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The certification means that
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements. The department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Page xvi
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Industry Canada CS-03
Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using
an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with
a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly
(telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility
designated by the supplier. Any repairs or installations made by the user to this equipment, or
equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request that the
user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power
utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This protection may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The Load Number assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total
load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent overloading.
The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the load numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page xvii
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Safety Certifications
SAFETY CERTIFICATIONS
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to comply with all the
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment U.L. 1459. This equipment
complies with Canadian Standards Association’s standard C 22.2 No. 225.
Safety Considerations
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury. Precautions include the following:
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install a telephone jack in a wet location, unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
• Never touch an uninsulated telephone wire or terminal, unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
NOTE:
Page xviii
More detailed precautions are included in this manual.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(1)
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
(2)
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
(3)
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
(4)
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
(5)
Read and understand all instructions.
(6)
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
(7)
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
(8)
Do not use this product near water; for example, under water pipes near a bath tub, sink, or
laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
(9)
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing
serious damage to the product.
(10) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to
protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.
This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product
should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.
(11) This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with your
local power company.
(12) This product normally connected with a three wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety
feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace
your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
(13) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord
will be abused by persons walking on it.
(14) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or
electric shock.
(15) Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
(16) To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified
serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may
expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric
shock when the appliance is subsequently used.
(17) Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls, that are covered by the operating instructions because improper
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work
by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
(e) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
(f) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
(18) Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may
be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
(19) Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Page 2
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
INTRODUCTION
Purpose
INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE
This manual explains the installation procedure for the NEAX2000 IVS2. This equipment can only
be serviced by a qualified service person. You should perform each installation step according to
the procedures described in CHAPTER 2.
OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL
This manual consists of the following chapters:
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name and functions of equipment,
the line conditions of each terminal, and the mounting conditions of circuit cards used in the system.
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system initialization
and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after completing the installation.
CHAPTER 3
LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the method of switch settings of each
circuit card used in the system.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 3
INTRODUCTION
Reference Manuals
REFERENCE MANUALS
During installation, refer to the following manuals:
Command Manual
Describes Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command function and setting data reguired for programming the system, and Resident System Program.
Office Data Programming Manual Contains the Customer Specification Sheets and Office
Data Entry Sheets.
Feature Programming Manual
Describes procedure of each feature programming.
Maintenance Manual
Describes maintenance service features and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.
Page 4
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter explains the outline of system configuration, the name
and functions of equipment, the line conditions of each terminal, and
the mounting conditions of circuit cards used in the system.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 5
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Trunking Diagram
TRUNKING DIAGRAM
This figure shows a typical trunking diagram for the system.
Figure 1-1 Trunking Diagram
NOTE:
The equipment marked with (*) is provided by the customer
PFT
PFT
SINGLE LINE TEL
LONG LINE STATION
SINGLE LINE TEL
WITH MESSAGE
WAITING LAMP
MP
COT
AUC
INCLUDING
AMP
LC
TDSW
DTG
PBSND
16CFT
MLDT
PLO
MEM
MODEM
PBR
DAT
DK
TNT
SMDR
AUC/DIT
ILC
ISDN TERMINAL
D
LC
term
DLC
DSS
LONG LINE Dterm
DLC
DSS
LDT
ODT
ODT
ATTCON (2 wire)/
DESKCON
DLC
CCH
CSI
DCH
AP00
EXPMEM
PMS
CIS/HOTEL
PRINTER
M10
AD-8
VM
DIGITAL
LINK
ISDN
NETWORK
ROUTER
IP
NETWORK
IPT
VCT
TIE LINE
4W E&M
PRT
ICH
SMDR
2W E&M
BRT
DLC
CS/ZT
DID LINE
LD
DTI
ATTCON (4 wire)
PS
C.O. LINE
OPTICAL
FIBER
DTI/REMOTE
PIM
PBR
DAT
PC FOR OAI
PC FOR OAI
RS-232C
TCP/IP
AP01
MFR
ETHER
CFT
DTE
V.11
RS-232C
DPC
DTE
V.35
RS-232C
M03
MAT
CIR
DK
COT
COT
RS-232C
6/10 PARTY CONFERENCE
KEY(*)
ANNOUNCEMENT
MACHINE(*)
EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)
AMPLIFIER
COT
SPEAKER(*)
(FOR REMOTE MAINTENANCE)
PSTN
COT
MAT
Page 6
COT/TNT
TNT
BGM (*)
EXTERNAL HOLD
TONE(*)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Trunking Diagram
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
AMP
Amplifier Trunk Card
KEY
External Key
AP00
SMDR/Hotel Application Card
LC
Line Circuit Card
(for Single Line Telephone)
AP01
OAI Interface Card
LDT
LD Trunk Card
AUC
Analog Universal Circuit Card
(Long Line Circuit, DID Trunk)
M03
V.35 DTE Interface Card
BGM
External Music Source for Dterm
Back Ground Music Service
M10
Optical Interface Card
BRT
Basic Rate Interface Trunk Card
MAT
Maintenance Administration Terminal
CCH
Common Channel Handler Card
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
CFT
6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card
MEM
Main Memory
CIS
Call Information System
MFR
MF Receiver/
MFC Receiver/Sender Card
CIR
CALLER ID Receiver Trunk Card
MLDT
Melody Trunk
COT
C.O. Trunk Card
MODEM Modem
CSI
CS/ZT Interface Card
MP
Main Processor Card
CS/ZT
Cell Station (For Australia/Others)
Zone Transceiver (For North America/
Latin America)
PFT
Power Failure Transfer
DAT
Digital Announcement Trunk Card
PMS
Property Management System
DCH
D-channel Handler Card
OAI
Open Application Interface
DIT
DID Trunk Card
ODT
OD Trunk Card (2/4 wire E&M)
DK
External Relay/Key Interface Card
PBR
PB Receiver Card
PBSND
PB Sender
Dterm,
DLC
Digital Line Circuit Card (for
ATTCON, DESKCON)
DPC
Data Port Controller Card
PLO
Phase Locked Oscillator
DSS
DSS Console
PS
Personal Station
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
PRT
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Trunk
Card
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface Card
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
DTG
Digital Tone Generator
TDSW
Time Division Switch
ETHER
Ethernet Control Card
TNT
Tone/Music Source Interface Card
EXPMEM Memory Expansion Card
VCT
CODEC Card
ICH
ISDN-channel Handler Card
VM
Voice Mail Card
ILC
ISDN Line Circuit Card
16CFT
16 Circuit Four Party Conference
Trunk
IPT
IP Trunk Card
KEY
External Key
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 7
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The system provides three installation methods as follows:
• Floor Standing Installation
• Wall Mounting Installation
• 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Example of system configurations for each installation method is shown below.
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 1-2 1-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation
223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
PIM
416.6 (16.4)
UNIT : mm (inch)
FRONT
Page 8
BASE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 1-3 2-PIM Configuration for Floor Standing Installation
223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
PIM
768.6 (30.2)
PIM/BATTM
FRONT
BASE
UNIT : mm (inch)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 9
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 1-4 Maximum Configuration for Floor Standing Installation
223 (8.8)
860 (33.9)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM7
PIM1
PIM6
1472.6
(58.0)
1824.6
(71.8)
PIM0
PIM5
PIM4
BATTM
BATTM
FRONT
Page 10
BASE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Wall Mounting Installation
Wall Mounting Installation
Figure 1-5 1-PIM Configuration for Wall-Mounting Installation
PIM
BASE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 11
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Figure 1-6 1-PIM Configuration for 19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
19” BRACKET
BASE
19-inch RACK
Page 12
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Equipment Name and Function
EQUIPMENT NAME AND FUNCTION
This section explains the names and functions of the equipment (modules, installation hardware,
circuit cards) used in the system.
Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of the modules.
Table 1-1 Module Name and Function
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
SN1480
PIMAF
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)
Max. 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power
interruption (for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of eight PIMs
and provides a total of 512 physical ports (64 ports x 8).
SN1545
BASERE
BASE/TOP
ASSEM
Base/Top Cover Assembly
One base and top cover assembly is required for each stack.
BATTM
Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup batteries
Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long power
interruption (for 3 hours).
TOP COVER
ASSEM
SN1526
BATTMF
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 13
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Module/Installation Hardware
This table shows the names and functions of installation hardware.
Table 1-2 Installation Hardware Name and Function
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
HANGER ASSEM (B)
Wall Hanger Assembly
One HANGER ASSEM per PIM is required for Wall Mounting
Installation.
MOUNTING BRACKET
Safety Mounting Bracket
Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation.
Wire, chain or eyebolts to secure the bracket are to be locally
provided.
To be installed on the top PIM in four or more modules of
stack. It provides 1.1G shockproof construction.
19” RACK BRACKET (A)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A
One bracket is required for one PIM configuration.
One bracket is required for the top PIM in a multiple module
configuration.
19” RACK BRACKET (B)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B
One bracket is required for the bottom module in a multiple
module configuration.
I/F BRACKET ASSEM
Inter Frame Bracket Assembly
Used to joint the frames in two-frame configuration; for Floor
Standing Installation.
BASE TRAY ASSEM
Base Tray Assembly
One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor
Standing Installation of Stationary Equipment.
Page 14
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Control Card
Control Card
This table shows the names and functions of each control card.
Table 1-3 Control Card Name and Function
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-CP14
MP
Main Processor Card
Provides Memory, TDSW (1024CH x 1024CH), 16-line CFT,
PB sender, Clock, PLO 2 ports (receiver mode/source
mode), two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration:
Max. 128sec.), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote
maintenance (19.2 kbps), internal Music-on-Hold tone
source and BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a
driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing
and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
One card is required per system.
PN-CP15
FP
Firmware Processor Card
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768KB), and
inter-module BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a
driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing
and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
When the system consists of three PIMs or more, one each
of this card is mounted respectively in PIM0, PIM2, PIM4,
and PIM6.
PN-PW00
EXTPWR
Power Supply Card for DESKCON
Provides –48V DC power.
Max. four cards per frame (four PIMs). Max. three cards per
PIM. Occupies two physical slots width per card.
PZ-PW121
AC/DC PWR
Main Power Supply Card
Input: AC120V/240V (50Hz/60Hz)
Output: –27V (4.4A), +5V (7.2A), CR (38mA), +90V (80mA)
One card is pre-installed per PIM.
PZ-PW122
DC/DC PWR
Power Supply Card for Cell Station (Zone Transceiver)
Input:
–24V DC
Output: –48V DC (1.7A)
One card per PIM.
Max. 16 CS (ZT)s backed up by one card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 15
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card
Application Processor Card
This table shows the names and functions of each application processor card.
Table 1-4 Application Processor Card Name and Function
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-AP00-A
DBM
[For North
America/
Latin America
Only]
Data Base Module Card for WCS Roaming function
One card per WCS system.
PN-AP00-B
AP00
Application Processor Card
Provides four RS-232C ports and is used for SMDR, Hotel
Printer, CIS, PMS, MCI, CS report functions.
One card per system.
PN-AP01
AP01
Application Processor Card
Provides one RS-232C port and one Ethernet interface port.
Used for OAI function, ID code expansion.
One card per system.
PN-BRTA
BRT
1-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
Accomodates one 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-2BRTC
BRT
2-line Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
Accomodates two 2-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-CC01
ETHER
Ethernet Control Card
Used with the PN-AP01 card to accommodate the Ethernet
and transmit/receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
10 BASE-T twisted pair cable is connected directly to this
card.
Page 16
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card
Table 1-4 Application Processor Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-DAIA
DAI
Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote
PIM
Accomodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides
Firmware Processor and BUS interface.
One through three cards, corresponding to the number of
remote site, must be provided at main site.
PN-DAIB
DAI
Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5 Mbps) Card for Remote
PIM
Accomodates 24-channel PCM digital lines, and provides
Firmware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at remote site.
PN-DAIC
DAI
Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5 Mbps) Channel
Expansion Card
Accomodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
One through six cards can be provided at main site.
Two cards can be provided at remote site.
PN-DAID
DAI
Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM
Accomodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides
Firmware Processor and BUS interface.
One through three cards, corresponding to the number of
remote site, must be provided at main site.
PN-DAIE
DAI
Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card for Remote PIM
Accomodates 30-channel PCM digital lines, and provides
Firmware Processor.
One card is required per Remote PIM at remote site.
PN-DAIF
DAI
Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Channel Expansion Card
Accomodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
One through three cards can be provided at main site.
One card can be provided at remote site.
PN-24DTA-C
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface (23B+D, 1.5 Mbps) Card
Accommodates 24-channel PCM digital lines.
PN-30DTC-A
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface (2 Mbps) Card
Accommodates 30-channel PCM digital lines.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 17
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card
Table 1-4 Application Processor Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-IPTA
IPT
IP Trunk Card
Accommodates the IP network and transmit/receive compressed voice or signals over IP network.
Used with max. four PN-4VCTH cards (16 channels).
10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected
directly to this card.
PN-24PRTA
PRT
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) Interface Card
Provides a built-in D-channel Handler (DCH).
PN-4RSTB
MFR
4-line MF Receiver, MFC Receiver/Sender Card
Used for MF/MFC-R2 Signaling on DID/DOD trunks.
Max. four cards can be provided per system, including the
PN-4RSTC card.
PN-4RSTC
CIR
4-line Caller ID Receiver Trunk Card
Used for Caller ID (CLASS SM) on analog trunks.
Max. four cards per system, including the PN-4RSTB card.
PN-SC00
CCH
Common Channel Handler Card
Transmits/receives signals on the common signalling channel
of No. 7 CCIS.
PN-SC01
DCH
D-channel Handler Card
Transmits/receives signals on the D-channel of ISDN Primary
Rate (23B+D) interface or WCS Roaming interface.
PN-SC03
ICH
ISDN-channel Handler Card
Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls max.
four ILC cards (Layer 2 and 3).
PN-SC03-A
CSH
CS(ZT) Handler Card
Provides the D-channel signaling interface and controls
max. four CSI cards, eight CS(ZT)s.
Page 18
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card
Table 1-4 Application Processor Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
PZ-M537
EXPMEM
FUNCTION
Memory Expansion Card for MP/AP00 Card
The system capacity is expanded as follows:
When mounted on PN-CP14 (MP) card:
System Capacity
w/o EXPMEM
384
500
1
256
256
with EXPMEM
768
1000
4
512
512
Analog Station+Dterm
256
512
Analog Station+Dterm+PS
256
512
Dterm (24/32 button)
PS
ISDN terminal
Data station
Call Forwarding-Outside set
Authorization Code/
Forced Account Code/
Remote Access to System
(DISA) Code
Message Remider set
Name Display/
Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station
(Station Speed Dial) set
MP built-in SMDR call record
256
512
128
64
64
240
1000
256
128
128
496
3000
512
256
1024
512
4000
10000
256
1280
Line/Trunk
DID dial conversion
IP trunk
Analog Station
Dterm
When mounted on PN-AP00-B (AP00) card:
System Capacity
SMDR call record
w/o EXPMEM
1600
with EXPMEM
27000
PZ-M542
[For Other
Countries]
CONN
Coaxial Cable Connection Card
Used to connect a coaxial cable for Digital Trunk Interface.
Max. two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.
PZ-M557
[For
Australia]
CONN
Coaxial Cable Connection Card
Used to connect a coaxial cable for Digital Trunk Interface.
Max. two cards can be connected to LTC connector of each
PIM.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 19
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card
Line/Trunk Card
This table shows the names and functions of each line/trunk card.
Table 1-5 Line/Trunk Card Name and Function
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-2AMPA
AMP
2-line Amplifier Trunk Card
Provides Echo Canceller (EC), Automatic Gain Controller
(AGC) and Tone Disabler (TD) functions.
PN-AUCA
AUC
2-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card provided with Power
Failure Transfer (PFT) Function, or 2-line Direct Inward
Dialing Trunk Card
Line resistance in the case of a long line circuit:
Max. 2500 ohms (inclusive of the internal resistance of the
distant office equipment)
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-CFTA
CFT
6/10 Party Conference Trunk Card
Use of one card: Can control a conference of up to six
participants.
Use of two cards: Can control a conference of up to ten
participants.
PN-CFTB
CFT
6 Party Conference Trunk Card
One card can control a conference of up to ten participants.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
PN-2COTD
[For Australia/Others]
COT
2-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides metering pulse detection function.
PN-4COTA-A
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
PN-4COTB
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Ground Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/
Ring wire.
PN-4COTF
[For N.Z.]
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start/Ground Start
Trunk)
Provides loop holding, pulse sender, and a detector for
ground signals.
Page 20
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card
Table 1-5 Line/Trunk Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-4COTE
[For
Australia]
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
PN-4COTG
COT
4-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start trunk)
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID
(CLASS SM) signal.
PN-6COTJ
[For
Australia]
COT
6-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
PN-8COTR
COT
8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
PN-8COTS
COT
8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Ground Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on Tip/
Ring wire.
PN-8COTT
[For
Australia]
COT
8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides a detector for line fault conditions.
PN-8COTQ
COT
8-line Central Office Trunk Card (Loop Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller ID
(CLASS SM) signal.
PN-2CSIA
[For North
America/
Latin
America]
CSI
2-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card
Used to interface with the ZT, based on ISDN S-interface.
Max. two ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies eight time slots per one card.
PN-2CSIA-A
[For Australia/Others]
CSI
2-line Cell Station Interface Card
Used to interface with the CS, based on ISDN S-interface.
Max. two CSs can be connected per one card.
Occupies eight time slots per one card.
PN-4DATC
DAT
4-line Digital Announcement Trunk Card
Recording duration: Max. 120 seconds
Occupies eight time slots per one card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 21
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card
Table 1-5 Line/Trunk Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-2DITA
[For Hong
Kong]
DIT
2-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card
Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to
DP signal conversion.
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4DITB
DIT
4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card
Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and PB to
DP signal conversion.
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-DK00
DK
8-circuit External Relay Control/External Key Scan Card
Provides the above-mentioned control functions on a per circuit basis.
PN-2DLCB/
PN-2DLCN
DLC
2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/
III), Dterm70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON
[–48V version, 2-wire type]
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-2DLCC
DLC
2-line Digital Long Line Circuit Card for SN610 ATTCON
[–48V version, 4-wire type]
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4DLCF
DLC
4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for SN610 ATTCON
[–27V version, 4-wire type]
PN-4DLCM
DLC
4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III),
Dterm70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON,
DESKCON
[–27V version, 2-wire type]
PN-4DLCQ
DLC
4-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65(Series E/III),
DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27V version, 2-wire type]
PN-8DLCL
DLC
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III),
Dterm70/60 (Elite/Electra Pro), DSS Console, ATTCON,
DESKCON
[–27V version, 2-wire type]
Page 22
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card
Table 1-5 Line/Trunk Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-8DLCP
DLC
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm75/65 (Series E/III),
DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27V version, 2-wire type]
PN-2DPCB
DPC
2-line Data Port Controller Card
Used for intra-office or inter-office digital data transmission
on nailed down connection.
Accommodates max. two DTEs with V.11 (X.21) interface or
V.24/V.28 (RS-232C) interface.
PN-2ILCA
ILC
2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card
Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies eight time slots per one card.
PN-4LCC
[For Others]
LC
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance: Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
PN-4LCD-A
LC
4-Line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
Provides momentary open and Message Waiting Lamp
control functions for each circuit.
Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCE
[For
Australia]
LC
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance: Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
PN-4LCF
[For
Australia]
LC
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance: Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control function for each
circuit, and reverse function for only No. 3 circuit.
Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCK
[For China]
LC
4-Line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 23
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card
Table 1-5 Line/Trunk Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-4LCL
[For China]
LC
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control function for each
circuit, and reverse function for only No. 3 circuit.
Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-4LCV
[For Brazil]
LC
4-Line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
PN-4LCW
[For Brazil]
LC
4-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control function for each
circuit, and reverse function for only No. 3 circuit.
Equipped with +80V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-8LCAA
LC
8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephones
Loop resistance : Max. 600 ohms (including telephone set)
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary open
functions for each circuit.
LDT
PN-2LDTA
[For
Australia/Others]
2-line Loop Dial Trunk Card
Line resistance: Max. 2500 ohms (including internal resistance of the distant office equipment)
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
PN-M03
M03
V.35 Data Terminal Equipment Interface Card
Used together with the PN-2DPCB card to provide the V.35
interface.
PN-M10
M10
Optical Interface Card
Provides internal optical modem to T1/E1 network or Remote
PIM.
Line length : 10 km or less
Line coding : CMI
Page 24
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card
Table 1-5 Line/Trunk Card Name and Function (Continued)
EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL
NAME
NAME
FUNCTION
PN-2ODTA
ODT
2-line Out Band Dialling Trunk Card
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.
PN-2ODTB
[For N.Z.]
ODT
2-line Out Band Dialling Trunk Card
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M trunk.
Equipped with –48V DC-DC on-board power supply.
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to the same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one card.
PN-8RSTA
PBR
8-line PB Receiver Card
Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line.
PN-TNTA
TNT
2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card
Used for BGM or Music on Hold.
Provides two jacks for an external tone/music source.
PN-4VCTH
VCT
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk
Voice compression protocols:
G723.1, G729/G729A, G711,
FAX (14.4 kbps), DTMF signals
Used together with PN-IPTA card.
PZ-8PFTB
PFT
8-line Power Failure Transfer Card
To be mounted in PFT slot of PIM.
One card per PIM.
PZ-VM00-M
VM
4-port Voice Mail Card (NEAXMail AD-8)
One card per system.
Number of ports : four ports (Up to eight ports when
PZ-VM01 is mounted)
Occupies three physical slots width per card.
To be mounted in LT00 slot of PIM.
PZ-VM01
VM
4-port Voice Mail Extension Card
To be mounted on PZ-VM00-M.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 25
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line Conditions of Each Terminal
LINE CONDITIONS OF EACH TERMINAL
The cable length between the DLC card and terminal varies depending on the type of terminal.
This table shows the line conditions of each Dterm, DSS/BLF Console, and Attendant Console.
Table 1-6 Line Conditions of Each Terminal
TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm75 (Series E)
(8 button)
Dterm75 (Series E)
(16 button)
Dterm75 (Series E)
(32 button)
CARD TYPE
CABLE LENGTH*
(Cable 0.5φ/24 AWG)
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
656 ft. (200 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
656 ft. (200 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
656 ft. (200 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
656 ft. (200 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
REMARKS
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
*The value in brackets [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied.
Page 26
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line Conditions of Each Terminal
Table 1-6 Line Conditions of Each Terminal (Continued)
TERMINAL TYPE
Dterm65 (Series III)
(8 button)
Dterm65 (Series III)
(24 button)
DSS/BLF Console
NOTE 2
CARD TYPE
CABLE LENGTH*
(Cable 0.5φ/24 AWG)
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
492 ft. (150 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
492 ft. (150 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
SN610 ATTCON
PN-4DLCF
(4-wire type ATTCON) (STANDARD)
PN-2DLCC
(LONG)
REMARKS
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
984 ft. (300 m)
3937 ft. (1200 m)
*The value in brackets [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 27
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line Conditions of Each Terminal
Table 1-6 Line Conditions of Each Terminal (Continued)
TERMINAL TYPE
CARD TYPE
CABLE LENGTH*
(Cable 0.5φ/24 AWG)
SN708/709/712
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
ATTCON
(STANDARD)
(2-wire type ATTCON) PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
(STANDARD)
984 ft. (300 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(LONG)
2788 ft. (850 m)
[3937 ft. (1200 m)]
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
and
PN-PW00 or
AC Adapter
1000 ft. (304 m)
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
and
PN-PW00 or
AC Adapter
1500 ft. (457 m)
SN716 DESKCON
984 ft. (300 m)
REMARKS
NOTE 1
*The value in brackets [ ] shows the cable length when local power is supplied.
NOTE 1: When using PN-8DLCL or PN-8DLCP card, it is not available long line function, even
if Dterm is equipped with Long Line Adapter.
NOTE 2: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC power supply.
Page 28
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Mounting Conditions of Circuit Card
MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD
This section explains the conditions for mounting circuit cards used in the system.
Circuit Card Mounting Slots
The figure below shows circuit card mounting slots allocated in the PIM based on circuit card
type.
Figure 1-7 Circuit Card Mounting Slots
MP12/FP12
PFT
LT11/AP11/FP11
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LT07/AP07
LT06/AP06
LT05/AP05
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
LT02/AP02
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
*3 *4
*5
AC/DC
PWR
*2
*1
LTC1
LTC3
LTC2
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
BWB
FRONT
LT00-LT11 : Line/Trunk card mounting slots
AP00-AP11 : Application Processor card
mounting slots
MP
: PN-CP14 mounting slot
FP
: PN-CP15 mounting slots
VM
PFT
AC/DC PWR
DC/DC PWR
:
:
:
:
PZ-VM00-M mounting slot
PZ-8PFTB mounting slot
PZ-PW121 mounting slot
PZ-PW122 mounting slot
*1 PZ-VM00-M card is to be mounted in LT00 slot to use VM slot.
*2 Either line/trunk cards or application processor cards can be mounted in LT00/AP00LT10/AP10 slots.
*3 Either PN-CP15 or a line/trunk card or an application processor card is to be mounted in
LT11/AP11/FP11 slot according to the system configuration.
*4 PN-CP14 or PN-CP15 card is to be mounted in MP12/FP12 slot according to the system
configuration.
*5 PZ-8PFTB card is to be mounted in PFT slot.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 29
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Circuit Card Mounting Slots
• Mountable slots according to the number of ports
The PIM can mount 8-port circuit cards.
Available slots are defined by the number of ports of the circuit card.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
P
F
T
V
M
8-port circuit cards are mountable
See below.*
4-port circuit cards are mountable
* In Slots 08-11, 8-port circuit cards are not mountable. The number of physical ports which
can be provided by Slots 08-11 depends on the number of ports of the circuit cards mounted
in Slots 04-07.
MOUNTING CIRCUIT
CARDS IN SLOT 04-07
MOUNTABLE CIRCUIT CARDS IN SLOT 08-11
8-port circuit cards such Any application processor cards
as;
Such as;
PN-8COT, PN-8DLC,
PN-AP00-A, PN-AP00-B, PN-AP01, PN-BRTA, PN-2BRTC,
PN-8LC, PN-8RSTA,
PN-CC01, PN-24DTA-C, PN-30DTC-A, PN-IPTA, PN-M03,
PN-4DAT, PN-CFTB,
PN-24PRTA, PN-4RSTB, PN-4RSTC, PN-SC01, PN-SC02,
PN-2CSI, PN-2ILC
PN-SC03, PN-SC03-A
4-port circuit cards
Page 30
4-port line/trunk cards or any application processor cards
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Control Card Mounting Conditions
Control Card Mounting Conditions
(1)
PN-CP14 (MP)
Mount the PN-CP14 card in the MP slot (Slot 12) of PIM0.
(2)
PN-CP15 (FP)
When the system is configured with three PIMs or more, mount one PN-CP15 card in the
FP slot (PIM0: Slot 11, PIM2, 4, 6: Slot 12) of PIM0, PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
When the system is configured with one or two PIMs, the PN-CP15 card needs not to be
mounted.
NOTE: For the correct number of FPs per system, refer to the Business/Hotel/Data Features
and Specifications manual.
Figure 1-8 MP/FP Card Mounting Slots
PIM3
PIM2
PIM7
F
P
12
F
P
12
PIM1
PIM0
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
PIM6
PIM5
F M
P P
11 12
F
P
12
PIM4
Page 31
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions
(1)
System Capacity for Application Processor Card
Max. 24 cards per system
Max. 256 ports per system
(2)
Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM0
Use slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM0.
AP11 Slot (FP11 slot) of PIM0 is not available for application processor if the system is
configured with three or more PIMs, as this slot is used to mount FP card for that
configuration.
Figure 1-9 Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (PIM0)
PFT
MP12
AP11/FP11
AP10
AP09
AP08
AP07
AP06
AP05
AP04
AP03
AP02
AP01
AP00
VM
AC/DC
PWR
PIM 0
*2
*1
LTC1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC3
LTC2
BWB
FRONT
*1 Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP10 slots.
*2 AP11 slot is available for application processor cards only when the system is configured
with two or less PIMs.
Page 32
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions
(3)
Mounting Application Processor Cards in PIM1-7
Use Slots AP00 to AP11 to mount application processor cards in PIM1 through 7.
Figure 1-10 Application Processor Card Mounting Slots (PIM1-7)
PFT
FP12
AP11
AP10
AP09
AP08
AP07
AP06
AP05
AP04
AP03
AP02
AP01
AP00
VM
PIM
1-7
AC/DC
PWR
*1
LTC1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC3
LTC2
BWB
FRONT
*1 Application processor cards can be mounted in AP00 to AP11 slots.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 33
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Application Processor Card Mounting Conditions
(4)
Mounting Conditions of Each Card
CARD NAME
MOUNTING CONDITIONS
PN-PW00
No circuit card can be mounted in the adjoining left side slot
because one card occupies two physical slots width.
PN-CC01
Mount the PN-CC01 card in the slot that adjoins the PN-AP01
card. Connect both cards using cable (48-TW-0.3 CONN CA).
PN-BRTA
PN-2BRTC
PN-24DTA-C
PN-30DTC-A
PN-24PRTA
Mount at least one card in PIM0 to receive source clock signals.
PZ-M542
PZ-M557
Mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card into any LTC connector of
PIM BWB.
Max. two cards can be mounted per PIM as follows:
LTC0 and LTC2
LTC0 and LTC3
LTC1 and LTC3
Page 34
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions
(1)
System Capacity for Line/Trunk Card
Max. 64 ports per PIM
Max. 512 ports per system
(2)
Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM0
Use Slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM0.
LT11 slot (FP11 slot) of PIM0 is not available for line/trunk cards if the system is configured
with three or more PIMs, as this slot is used to mount FP card for that configuration.
Figure 1-11 Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (PIM0)
PFT
MP12
LT11/FP11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
AC/DC
PWR
PIM0
*3
*1
*2
LTC1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC3
LTC2
BWB
FRONT
*1 8-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.
*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT10 slots.
*3 LT11 slot is available for 4-port line/trunk cards only when the system is configured with
two or less PIMs.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 35
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Line/Trunk Card Mounting Conditions
(3)
Mounting Line/Trunk Cards in PIM1-7
Use Slots LT00 to LT11 to mount line/trunk cards in PIM1 through 7.
Figure 1-12 Line/Trunk Card Mounting Slots (PIM1-7)
PFT
FP12
LT11
LT10
LT09
LT08
LT07
LT06
LT05
LT04
LT03
LT02
LT01
LT00
VM
PIM
1-7
AC/DC
PWR
*1
*2
LTC1
LTC0
DC/DC
PWR
LTC3
LTC2
BWB
FRONT
*1 8-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT07 slots.
*2 4-port Line/Trunk cards can be mounted in LT00 to LT11 slots.
Page 36
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
This chapter explains how to install the PBX and the peripheral equipment, system initialization and data entry, and operation test procedures you should follow after completing the installation.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 37
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be
connected to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as
shown below:
• Communication grounding : Less than 10 ohm
• Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10 ohm
NOTE:
The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 0.5Vp-p.
CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never
operate this equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected.
The following specific requirements apply to ground wiring.
• An equipment grounding conductor that is at least as large as the ungrounded branchsupply conductors is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the NEAX2000 IVS2.
Bare, covered, or insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or
insulated equipment grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either
green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. The equipment grounding connector is to
be connected to ground at the service equipment.
• The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the NEAX2000 IVS2 are all to be of a
grounding type, and the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to
be connected to earth ground at the service equipment.
Page 38
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Static Electricity Guard
Static Electricity Guard
You must wear a grounded wrist strap to protect circuit cards from static electricity.
Figure 2-1 Static Electricity Guard (1 of 2)
• WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING A CIRCUIT CARD
PBX
FRAME GROUND SCREW
WRIST STRAP
• WHEN HOLDING A CIRCUIT CARD
NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS OR
SOLDERED SURFACE WITH BARE HANDS.
CARD FRONT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 39
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Static Electricity Guard
Figure 2-1 Static Electricity Guard (2 of 2)
• WHEN MAKING A SWITCH SETTING ON A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
WEAR A WRIST STRAP AND PERFORM
THE WORK ON A GROUNDED
CONDUCTIVE WORK SURFACE.
• WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT CARD
CIRCUIT
CARD
CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE
BAG
WHEN CARRYING A CIRCUIT
CARD AROUND, KEEP THE
CARD IN A CONDUCTIVE
POLYETHYLENE BAG.
Page 40
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards
When removing a circuit card from the PIM or when mounting a circuit card in the PIM, follow the
procedure in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards
PROCEDURE
CIRCUIT CARD
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PLUG
UNPLUG
PN-CP14 (MP)
(1) Power off
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR) (2) Plug in
PZ-M537 (EXTMEM)
(3) Power on
(1) Power off
PN-AP00-A (DBM)
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
PN-AP01 (AP01)
PN-BRTA (BRT)
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
PN-CP15 (FP)
PN-DAIA (DAI)
PN-DAIB (DAI)
PN-DAIC (DAI)
PN-DAID (DAI)
PN-DAIE (DAI)
PN-DAIF (DAI)
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
PN-IPTA (IPT)
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
PN-4RSTC (CIR)
PN-SC00 (CCH)
PN-SC01 (DCH)
PN-SC03 (ICH)
PN-SC03-A (CSH)
PZ-M542 (CONN)
PZ-M557 (CONN)
PZ-VM00-M (VM)
PZ-VM01 (VM)
(1) Power off
or MB
switch on
(1) Power off
or MB
switch on
(2) Plug in
(2) Unplug
(3) Power on
or MB
switch off
(3) Power on
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
(2) Unplug
(3) Power on
CONDITION
These circuit cards must be
plugged in or unplugged only
with power off to prevent damage to the card or other system
circuitry.
These circuit cards must be
plugged in or unplugged under
Make Busy condition or power
off to prevent damage to the
card or other system circuitry.
Page 41
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Procedure for Unplugging/Plugging Circuit Cards
CAUTION
You must hold the edge of a circuit card when plugging or unplugging the circuit card. If you
touch another area, you may be exposed to hazardous voltages.
PBX
NEVER TOUCH THE COMPONENTS
OR SOLDERED SURFACE WITH
BARE HANDS.
CARD FRONT
Page 42
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Turning Power ON
Turning Power ON
CAUTION
1. When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
2. When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable provides gang control
for the PZ-PW121 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is off, no
power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs are
left on. Note, however, that the battery continues to charge even under these circumstances.
3. Do not turn off the PZ-PW121 card on PIM1 to PIM7 when the system is operating.
(1)
Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121 card before turning power on.
• Make sure that the AC120V/240V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for
each country (AC120V or AC240V).
SW
100V/120V
240V
• Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to meet the
kind of battery:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2
OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121 cards to ON. First, turn ON PIM1 to PIM7.
Then, turn ON PIM0 last of all.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 43
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Turning Power OFF
Turning Power OFF
(1)
Before turning power off, make sure that all line/trunk cards are not operating by no busy
lamps indication.
(2)
Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121 cards to OFF. First, turn OFF PIM0. Then, turn
OFF PIM1 to PIM7.
Page 44
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Procedure
PROCEDURE
This flowchart explains the procedures for installing the PBX system. Follow the procedures in
Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Procedure Flowchart (1 of 2)
START
UNPACKING
Page 49
WIRING AC CABLE
TO
TERMINALS
Page 50
INSTALLATION
OF
MAIN EQUIPMENT
Page 54
POWER CABLE
CONNECTION
Page 83
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK
AND
HEAT RUN TEST
Page 90
BATTERY
CONNECTION
Page 94
CABLE RUNNING
TO MDF
Page 102
TERMINATION OF
CABLES ON MDF
Page 109
INSTALLATION
OF
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
SWITCH SETTINGS
OF
CIRCUIT CARDS
Page 128
REFER TO CHAPTER 3.
A
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 45
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Procedure
Figure 2-2 Procedure Flowchart (2 of 2)
A
MOUNTING
CIRCUIT CARDS
SYSTEM
INITIALIZATION
Page 199
Page 201
Page 202
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY
OPERATION TEST
Page 204
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
Page 205
CLEANING
AND
VISUAL CHECK
Page 205
MOUNTING FRONT COVER
END
For Floor Standing Installation, there are three methods to install the equipment. It depends on
the country according to the UL/cUL/ACA.
NOTE:
UL = Underwriters Laboratories (U.S.A.)
cUL = Canadian Underwriters Laboratories (Canada)
ACA = Australian Communication Authority (Australia)
“Stationary Equipment (For North America/ Australia)”
“Fixed Equipment (For North America/ Australia)”
“Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries)”
Page 46
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Stationary Equipment (For North America/Australia)
Stationary Equipment (For North America/Australia)
The equipment is placed on the BASE TRAY which is fixed on the floor, and is connected to 120V/
240V AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.
For installation of Stationary Equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D Page 50
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE TRAY Page 58
- Installation of PIM, For Stationary Equipment
Page 55
Fixed Equipment (For North America/Australia)
The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to AC
Power Distribution Board using installation cable.
For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using installation Cable Page 52
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE Page 58
- Installation of PIM, For Fixed Equipment
Page 55
Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries)
The equipment is fixed on the floor by BASE PLATE and anchor bolts, and is connected to 120V/
240V AC Power Source using AC CORD-D cable.
For installation of this equipment, see the following pages.
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS - Using AC CORD-D Page 50
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT - Floor Marking for BASE PLATE Page 58
- Installation of PIM, For Fixed Equipment
Page 55
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 47
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Fixed Equipment (For Other Countries)
The mark shown below is attached to each procedure in which circuit cards are handled. When
doing such a procedure, the installer must perform the procedure with caution, to prevent damage caused by static electricity (See “Static Electricity Guard” on Page 39).
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Page 48
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Unpacking
UNPACKING
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
(1)
Check the received quantity of packages containing the PBX system with the description on
the shipping document.
(2)
Check the packaging for external damage done by transportation and record it as
necessary.
(3)
Unpack the packaging.
• For unpacking the packages containing circuit cards, a grounded wrist strap should be
worn.
(4)
Check the quantity of equipment and materials unpacked with the shipping document.
(5)
Perform visual inspection, checking for the following items.
• PIMs
Overall distortion.
Scratches and dents on the surface.
Scratches and cracks on the PIM Backplane.
Broken or bent pins on the PIM Backplane.
• Covers
Scratches and dents.
• Circuit Cards
Overall distortion
Scratches and cracks
Loss, or damage of parts on the circuit cards.
• Attendant Console
Scratches and cracks on the keyboard
Overall distortion
Damage to Keys and lamps.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 49
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Wiring AC Cable to Terminals
WIRING AC CABLE TO TERMINALS
There are two kinds of AC cable : AC CORD-D For Stationary Equipment/Fixed Equipment (For
Other Countries)
: Installation Cable For Fixed Equipment (For North America/
Australia)
Using AC CORD-D
(1)
(2)
(3)
Take the AC CORD-D out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the code to
the BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: Cord bush is attached to the AC CORD-D.
Wire the AC CORD-D and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground terminals
on the BASE.
Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.
Figure 2-3 Wiring AC CORD to Terminals
NOTE:
Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
BASE
TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121 in PIM
FG CABLE
(GREEN)
AC CORD-B
WHITE (BLUE)
BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
TO
120V/240V
AC POWER
SOURCE
LINE
BLACK (BROWN)
AC CORD-D
2
NEUTRAL
1
WHITE (BLUE)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK
1 INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
2 PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
3 INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
4 REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.
3
4
FRONT
Page 50
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Using AC CORD-D
(4)
When the system is two-frame configuration, the AC CORD-D of the right side frame can
go through the BASE of the left side frame.
Figure 2-4 AC CORD Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration
TO
120V/240V AC
POWER SOURCE
AC CORD-D
BASE
CORD BUSH
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
NEUTRAL
LINE
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
Page 51
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Using Installation Cable
Using Installation Cable
(1)
(2)
(3)
Take the Installation cable out of the hole on the left side of the BASE, then secure the cable
to the BASE with the cord bush.
NOTE: The installer is to use minimum 16 AWG (1.3φ) size wire, maximum 9 mm size
cable.
Wire the Installation cable and the FG cable to the FG, NEUTRAL, LINE and Ground
terminals on the BASE.
Wire the AC CORD-B to the FG, NEUTRAL and LINE terminals on the BASE.
Figure 2-5 Wiring Installation Cable to Terminals
NOTE:
Cable colors in the parentheses are for Australia.
BASE
TO CN1 on
PZ-PW121 in PIM
FG CABLE
(GREEN)
AC CORD-B
WHITE (BLUE)
BLACK (BROWN)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
TO AC
POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
BLACK (BROWN)
INSTALLATION CABLE
2
WHITE (BLUE)
GREEN
(GREEN/YELLOW)
HOW TO SECURE CABLES TO TERMINAL BLOCK
1
1
2
3
4
3
4
INSERT A SCREW DRIVER INTO THE INSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
PULL DOWN THE SCREW DRIVER TOWARD INSIDE AND OPEN THE METAL PLATE.
INSERT A POWER CABLE INTO THE OUTSIDE HOLE OF TERMINAL BLOCK.
REMOVE THE SCREW DRIVER.
FRONT
Page 52
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Using Installation Cable
(4)
When the system is two-frame configuration, the Installation cable of the right side frame
can go through the BASE of the left side frame.
Figure 2-6 Installation Cable Wiring for Two-Frame Configuration
TO
AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
INSTALLATION CABLE
BASE
CORD BUSH
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
FG
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
NEUTRAL
LINE
FG
NEUTRAL
LINE
Page 53
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Installation of Main Equipment
INSTALLATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT
Floor Standing Installation
Start
Checkup
before installation
Marking
Leveling
Drilling
Detaching Front Cover
• Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that
the required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and
ducts for trunk/extension cables, power cables and bus cables have
been properly worked at correct positions. See Figure 2-7 and Figure
2-8.
• Mark positions for installation of the PBX main equipment.
For Fixed Equipment, detach the BASE PLATE from the BASE. See
Figure 2-9.
For Stationary Equipment, see Figure 2-10.
NOTE:
Measure the level of the floor surface before installing the PBX
main equipment.
• Check the level of the floor. If necessary, adjust the level by inserting
spacers beneath the equipment.
• First open necessary number of preliminary prepared holes using the
drill bit for small-diameter holes, then use the finishing drill bit for finishing drill holes. See “Drilling” on Page 59.
• Detach the front cover of each PIM. See “Detaching FRONT COVER”
on Page 60.
A
Page 54
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
A
Installation of PIM
• For Fixed Equipment
(1) Fix the BASE PLATE to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the BASE to the BASE PLATE with screws. See Figure 2-12.
(3) Fix the PIM onto the BASE with screws. See Figure 2-13.
• For Stationary Equipment
(1) Fix the BASE TRAY to the floor with anchor bolts.
(2) Fix the PIM onto the BASE with screws. See Figure 2-13.
(3) Place the Module and the BASE on the BASE TRAY. See Figure 214.
Installation of
Multiple-Module
Installation of
Top Cover
Installation of
Mounting Bracket
Checking
• Connect PIMs with screws. See Figure 2-17.
• Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is
stacked with five or more PIMs. See “Installation of I/F BRACKET” on
Page 69.
• Install the TOP COVER to the top-stack PIM. See “Installation of TOP
COVER” on Page 70.
• Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment
is stacked with four or more PIMs. See “Installation of MOUNTING
BRACKET” on Page 71.
• Carefully review every step above to ensure that all necessary screws
are properly placed and tightened.
End
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 55
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 2-7 Floor Space
UNIT : mm (inch)
223 (8.8)
430 (16.9)
200 (7.9)
1000 (39.4)
MAINTENANCE
AREA
200 (7.9)
PIM/BATTM
BASE
FRONT
Page 56
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 2-8 Cable Hole Location
PIM
BASE
FRONT
: CABLE HOLE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 57
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 2-9 Floor Marking for BASE PLATE (for Fixed Equipment)
ANCHOR BOLT x 4
30
(7.9)
(1.6)
(5.0)
(1.3)
UNIT : mm (inch)
(WALL)
202.6
40.6
128
34
: 10 (0.4)
Using MOUNTING BRACKET
Not Using MOUNTING BRACKET : 1.7 (0.1)
30
(1.2)
(1.2)
347.2 (13.7)
412.4 (16.2)
Figure 2-10 Floor Marking for BASE TRAY (for Stationary Equipment)
ANCHOR BOLT x 4
Page 58
(1.8)
(5.0)
128
45
UNIT : mm (inch)
43.9
347.2
(1.7)
(13.7)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Drilling
(1) Make a preliminary hole in the concrete, using a drill bit for small-diameter holes.
(2) Drill a hole in the concrete with a drill suitable for a plug bolt a little deeper than the plug
bolt length.
Anchor Bolt Size : 10mm (0.39 inch)
DIA for Fixed Equipment
6mm (0.24 inch)
DIA for Stationary Equipment
(3) Insert the anchor bolt into the hole.
(4) Push anchor bolt until the bolt stays permanently in place.
(5) Turn bolt counterclockwise and remove.
(6) Insert bolts correctly into the holes for equipment installation, then tighten them properly.
Figure 2-11 Drilling Instructions for Anchor Bolt
(1)
(2)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Page 59
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Detaching FRONT COVER
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Push portion A of the COVER PARTS to release the LATCH.
Pivot the COVER PARTS on its left side to remove it.
Loosen its one screw.
Lift up the STOPPER to unlock.
Pivot the FRONT COVER on its bottom to remove it.
Detaching FRONT COVER
(1)
PUSH COVER PARTS.
COVER PARTS
PUSH
PORTION A
(2)
REMOVE COVER PARTS.
Page 60
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
(3)
LOOSEN A SCREW.
(4)
LIFT UP STOPPER (UNLOCK).
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 61
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
(5)
REMOVE FRONT COVER.
Page 62
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE for Fixed Equipment
(1) Mount the BASE on the BASE PLATE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the BASE into the inner end.
(3) Secure the BASE to the BASE PLATE with two screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the BASE PLATE.
Figure 2-12 Connection of BASE and BASE PLATE
BASE
HOOKS
FRONT
BASE PLATE
BASE
SLIDE BASE INTO INNER END.
BASE PLATE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 63
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Connection of PIM and BASE for Fixed/Stationary Equipment
(1) Mount the PIM on the BASE by placing it over the hooks.
(2) Slide the PIM into the inner end.
(3) Fix the PIM to the BASE with three screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the Module.
Figure 2-13 Connection of PIM and BASE
SCREWS
BASE
HOOKS
PIM
SLIDE PIM INTO
INNER END.
BASE
Page 64
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Placing PIM on BASE TRAY for Stationary Equipment
Place the PIM and the BASE on the BASE TRAY.
Figure 2-14 Placing PIM on BASE TRAY
BASE TRAY
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 65
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Connection of PIMs
NOTE:
The FRONT STOPPER, BUILD PLATES, and screws are attached to the PIM.
(1) Insert the BUILD PLATES (R)/(L) into the slits of the SIDE FRAME, then slide them
backward and lock them.
(2) Place the FRONT STOPPER on the PIM, then secure it with three screws.
Figure 2-15 Connection of BUILD PLATE
BUILD PLATE (R)
BUILD PLATE (L)
SIDE FRAME
Page 66
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
Figure 2-16 Connection of FRONT STOPPER
FRONT
STOPPER
PZ-PW121
SCREW
PIM TOP FRAME
SCREW
SCREW
PIM SIDE FRAME
FRONT STOPPER
SCREWS
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 67
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
(3) Hook the PIM onto the BUILD PLATE’s hooks.
(4) Slide the PIM backward until it comes to the back end.
(5) Secure the PIM with three screws.
Figure 2-17 Connection of Modules
SCREWS
Page 68
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Installation of I/F BRACKET
Install the I/F BRACKET to the top-stack PIMs if the equipment is stacked with four or more
PIMs.
Secure the I/F BRACKET to rear side of top-stack PIMs with two screws from inside of PIMs.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the I/F BRACKET.
FRONT SIDE
SCREW
SCREW
I/F BRACKET
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 69
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Installation of TOP COVER
(1) Hang four hooks of the TOP COVER on the back board of PIM as shown below.
(2) Secure the TOP COVER to the front side of the PIM with two screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to BASE/TOP ASSEM.
HOOK
Page 70
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Floor Standing Installation
• Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET
Install the MOUNTING BRACKET to the top-stack PIM if the equipment is stacked with four
or more PIMs.
(1) Remove four screws located on the rear side of the top-stack PIM.
(2) Secure the MOUNTING BRACKET to the PIM with the removed screws.
(3) Secure the PIM to the wall or ceiling by using wires, chains and eyebolts (locally
provided).
Figure 2-18 Installation of MOUNTING BRACKET
FRONT
PIM
SCREWS
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
MOUNTING BRACKET
Page 71
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Wall Mounting Installation
Wall Mounting Installation
Start
Checkup
before installation
Detaching
Front Cover
Marking
Installation of PIM
• Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that
the required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts
for trunk/extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors
have been properly worked at correct positions.
See Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.
• Detach the front cover of each PIM. See “Detaching FRONT COVER”
on Page 60.
• Mark hole positions for installation of the PBX main equipment. See
Figure 2-19.
• Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the wall.
• Hang the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM. See Figure 2-20.
NOTE: The BATTM cannot be installed on the wall.
Multiple-PIM
Configuration
• After hanging each PIM to the respective HANGER ASSEMs, connect
PIMs using screws. See “Connection of PIMs” on Page 66.
Checking
• Carefully review every step above to ensure that all necessary screws
are properly placed and tightened.
End
Page 72
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Wall Mounting Installation
Figure 2-19 Wall Marking for HANGER ASSEM
(13.9)
352
352
(13.9)
356.5
(14.0)
352
(8.3)
(8.3)
(8.3)
352
(8.3)
210.8
210.8
210.8
210.8
ANCHOR/
SCREW
(13.9)
(7.0)
(13.9)
(7.0)
UNIT : mm (inch)
(8.3)
167.5
210.8
167.5
(x 3/PIM)
HANGER ASSEM
BASE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 73
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Wall Mounting Installation
• Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM
(1) Secure the HANGER ASSEM to the surface of a wall with three screws.
Select screws to match with the wall type as follows.
WALL TYPE
RECOMMENDED SCREW
CONCRETE
ANCHOR BOLT TYPE
Recommended 4 mm (0.16 inch) by
25 mm (0.98 inch)
WOOD
WOOD TYPE SCREWS
Min. 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA
Max. 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA
PLASTER BOARD
[THICKNESS Min. 9.6 mm (0.38 inch)]
MOLLY ANCHOR TYPE
Min. 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) DIA
Max. 4.5 mm (0.17 inch) DIA
A concrete wall is recommended because it is the most firm to mount the PBX of the
three. The plaster board is the least firm wall of the three.
(2) Hang the slits of the rear of a PIM to the hooks of the HANGER ASSEM.
(3) Secure the PIM to the HANGER ASSEM with two screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the HANGER ASSEM.
Figure 2-20 Hanging PIM to HANGER ASSEM
HANGER ASSEM
HOOK
HOOK
PIM
BASE
SCREWS
Page 74
FRONT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Start
Checkup
before installation
Detaching
Side Cover/Side Panel
One PIM
Configuration
Multiple-PIM
Configuration
Checking
• Check the site for installing the PBX with the work drawing to verify that
the required floor space is ensured and that service entrances and ducts
for trunk/extension cables, power cables and grounding conductors
have been properly worked at correct positions.
See Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8.
• Detach the SIDE COVER and SIDE PANEL of the Module for 19” RACK
BRACKET (A) mounting. For 19” RACK BRACKET (B), this procedure
is not required. See “Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL” on
Page 76.
• Mount the 19” RACK BRACKET (A) to the PIM. See “Connection of 19”
RACK BRACKET (A)” on Page 78.
• Mount the PIM with the 19” RACK BRACKET (A) to the 19-inch RACK.
See “Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK” on Page 79.
• Mount the 19” RACK BRACKET (B) to the bottom-stack PIM. See “Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (B)” on Page 80.
• Mount the 19” RACK BRACKET (A) to the top-stack PIM. See “Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (A)” on Page 78.
• Mount the PIMs with the 19” RACK BRACKET (A) and (B) to the 19-inch
RACK. See Figure 2-25.
• Carefully review every step above to ensure that all necessary screws
are properly placed and tightened.
End
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 75
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
• Detaching SIDE COVER/SIDE PANEL
(1) Remove the two screws fixing the SIDE COVER.
(2) Pivot the SIDE COVER on its bottom to remove it.
(3) Remove the SIDE PANEL fixed by three screws, from the left side flame of the PIM.
Figure 2-21 Detaching SIDE COVER (1 of 2)
SCREW
SIDE COVER
Page 76
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Figure 2-21 Detaching SIDE PANEL (2 of 2)
SCREWS
SIDE PANEL
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 77
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
• Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (A)
(1) Insert the nails of the 19” RACK BRACKET (A) into the side frame of the PIM.
(2) Secure them with four screws each.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the 19” RACK BRACKET (A).
Figure 2-22 Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (A)
19” RACK BRACKET (A)
SCREWS
NAILS
Page 78
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
• Mounting PIM to 19-inch RACK
(1) Mount the PIM with 19” RACK BRACKET (A) into the 19-inch RACK.
(2) Secure them with four screws (locally provided).
Figure 2-23 Mounting PIM to 19-inch Rack
SCREWS
19” RACK BRACKET (A)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 79
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
• Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (B)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
NOTE:
Place the BASE PLATE on the 19” RACK BRACKET (B).
Secure the BASE PLATE with four washers and nuts.
Mount the BASE to the BASE PLATE. (See Figure 2-12.)
Mount the PIM to the BASE. (See Figure 2-13.)
Nuts and washers are attached to the 19” RACK BRACKET (B).
Figure 2-24 Connection of 19” RACK BRACKET (B)
NUT
WASHER
19” RACK BRACKET (B)
BASE PLATE
Page 80
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Figure 2-25 Mounting Multiple-PIM to 19-inch RACK
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 81
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
BUS Cable Connection
BUS Cable Connection
When the system is a multiple-PIM configuration, connect all the BUS Connector to each other
using BUS cables, as shown below.
Be sure to secure the BUS cables using tie wraps to avoid obstructing a PFT card.
Figure 2-26 BUS Cable
700 mm (27.6 inch)
48-TW-0.7 CONN CA
Connection of BUS Cables
TIE WRAP
PIM3
P
W
R
P
W
R
BUS CABLE
PIM7
FRONT
PIM2
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM6
PIM1
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM5
PIM0
P
W
R
P
W
R
PIM4
48-TW-0.7 CONN CA
Page 82
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Cable Connection
POWER CABLE CONNECTION
The cable connections on the PZ-PW121 card are shown below.
Figure 2-27 Cable Connection on PZ-PW121
NOTE 1: Follow the Label on Front Plate of PZ-PW121.
NOTE 2: If GND (Signal GND) has to be separated from FG (Frame GND), remove the link between GND and FG terminals.
SW101
OFF
MJ
12
PWR CNT CA-D (for PIM1 to PIM 7)
PWR CNT CA-E (for PIM0)
MN
NOTE 1
ON
1: OFF: NO CONNECTION
2: ON: SEAL/FLOAT2
OFF: OPEN/FLOAT1
ON
SW101
CN103
TO PWR1 CONNECTOR ON BWB
TO PWR0A CONNECTOR ON BWB
-27V
TO AUXILIARY
EQUIPMENT
FG
TO PWR0B CONNECTOR ON BWB
CN104
GND NOTE 2
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5V, -27V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90V, CR, E)
CAUTION
Set the appropriate voltage
before turning on the SW1
switch.
PWR CA-A
TO OTHER PZ-PW121
100V /120V
240V
SW2
TO BATTERY OR OTHER PZ-PW121
O I
CN1
SW1
PWR CA-A/BATT CA
TO
FRAME GROUND TERMINAL
IN PIM
L
N
FG
NOMINAL
AC INPUT
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE
AC CORD-B
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 83
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Connection of AC CORD-B
Connection of AC CORD-B
(1)
(2)
Connect the AC CORD-B to the CN1 connector on the PZ-PW121 card.
Screw the ground cable of the AC CORD-B to the frame ground terminal on the PIM.
Figure 2-28 Connection of AC CORD-B
PZ-PW121
TO 120V/240V AC POWER SOURCE
AC CORD-D
CN1
CORD BUSH
BASE
AC CORD-B
FRONT
TERMINAL BLOCKS
Page 84
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Connection of DC Power Cable
Connection of DC Power Cable
(1)
(2)
Confirm the connection of power output cables, as shown below (These cables are preinstalled).
For PIM0, connect the PWR CNT CA-E to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121 card and
the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
For PIM1 to PIM7, connect the PWR CNT CA-D to the CN103 connector on the PZ-PW121
card and the PWR1 connector on the BWB.
Figure 2-29 PWR CNT CA-D/PWR CNT CA-E
250 mm (9.8 inch)
300 mm (11.8 inch)
550 mm (21.7 inch)
Figure 2-30 Cable Connection between PZ-PW121 and BWB
PIM
PZ-PW121
BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)
PWR1
CN103
PWR0A
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA
PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5V, -27V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 85
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Connection of DC Power Cable
(3)
When you need a –48V DC power supply installed for a Cell Station (Zone Transceiver) in
WCS system, do the following procedure. If not, skip this procedure and go to item (4) on
Page 88.
STEP 1: Attach four screws preliminary to the PZ-PW122 card.
STEP 2: Mount the PZ-PW122 card into the PIM which accommodates the CSI cards, and fasten the screws.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the PZ-PW122 card.
Figure 2-31 Mounting PZ-PW122 into PIM
PIM
PZ-PW122
Page 86
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Connection of DC Power Cable
STEP 3: Connect the PWR CNT CA-E or PWR CNT CA-D, and POWER OUTPUT CABLE
(–48V, E) as shown below.
Figure 2-32 Cable Connection between PZ-PW121/PZ-PW122 and BWB
PIM
PZ-PW121
BWB (BACK WIRING BOARD)
PWR1
CN103
PWR0A
PWR0B
CARD SLOT AREA
PWR0C
LTC CONNECTOR AREA
PZ-PW122
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+5V, -27V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48V, E)
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (+90V, CR, E)
PWR CNT CA-E (FOR PIM0)
PWR CNT CA-D (FOR PIM1 TO PIM7)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 87
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Connection of DC Power Cable
(4)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the PZ-PW121 cards to
each other using the PWR CA-A for power multi-connection.
Figure 2-33 PWR CA-A
550 mm (21. 7inch)
PWR CA-A
Figure 2-34 Connection of PWR CA-A Cables
(a) When using an Internal Battery
PWR
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
CA-A
PIM3
PIM7
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
PWR
PIM2
PIM6
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
CA-A
PIM1
PIM5
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
PWR
PIM0
PIM4
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
Page 88
TO INTERNAL
BATTERY
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Connection of DC Power Cable
Figure 2-35 Connection of PWR CA-A Cables
(b) When using an External Battery
PWR
PWR
PIM 3
PIM 7
PWR
CA-A
PWR
PWR
PIM 2
PWR
CA-A
PIM 6
PWR
PWR
PIM 1
PIM 5
PWR
PWR
PIM 0
PIM 4
TO EXTERNAL BATTERY
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 89
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Supply Voltage Check And Heat Run Test
SUPPLY VOLTAGE CHECK AND HEAT RUN TEST
Precautions
(1)
Check the switch position of each PZ-PW121 card before turning power on.
• Make sure that the AC120V/240V selector switch is positioned to appropriate voltage for
each country (AC120V or AC240V).
SW
100V/120V
240V
• Make sure that the battery mode selector switch is positioned as shown below to meet the
kind of battery:
SW101
OFF
1 : Not used
1
2 : ON (SEAL/FLOAT2)
2
OFF (OPEN/FLOAT1)
ON
(2)
When the operating power is being supplied to the PZ-PW121 card, do not plug/unplug this
circuit card into/from its mounting slot.
(3)
Immediately follow the instructions below if the MJ lamp on the PZ-PW121 lights up or
smoke or an unpleasant odor is produced during the test:
a) Turn power off of all PZ-PW121 cards.
b) Unplug the AC code from the wall outlet.
c) Carefully check for cause(s) of the failure occurring.
NOTE: Do not turn power on again until the cause is detected.
(4)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, the BUS cable is providing gang
control for the PZ-PW121 card of PIM0 and other PIMs. Therefore, if the power of PIM0 is
off, no power is supplied to the whole system even when the power switch(es) of other PIMs
are left on. Note, however, that the battery charging is continuing even under these
circumstances.
Page 90
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Routing
Power Routing
NOTE 1: PN-4LCD/4LCF/4LCL/4LCW card provides +80V on-board power supply (+80VOBP).
NOTE 2: PN-AUCA, PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN, PN-2DLCC, PN-2LDTA, PN-2ODTA/2ODTB card
provides –48V on-board power supply (–48VOBP).
PZ-PW121
TO PIM2
+5V
PIM1
-27V
Ð27V
CR
+90V
AC
PZ-PW121
PWR CA-A
NOTE 1
+5V
+5V
+80VOBP
BATTERY
-27V
-27V
CR
+80V
PIM0
-27V
-5V
CR
AC
+90V
NOTE 2
-5V
+5V
-48VOBP
AC CORD-B
-48V
-27V
CR
PN-8LCAA
+5V
-27V
-5V
CR
+90V
AC CORD-D
TO AC MAINS INPUT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
TERMINAL
BLOCKS
BASE
Page 91
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Checking for Supply Voltage
Checking for Supply Voltage
Start
Checking power cable
and
grounding conductor
Testing for input power
Connecting AC power
Turning power ON
Verifying power
pilot lamp ON
Testing for
output voltage
• Before connecting AC Cord, verify:
- that the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121 card is positioned to OFF;
- that the AC Cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• Use a tester to verify that the input power is AC120±10V or AC240±10V.
• Plug the AC cord into a wall outlet.
• Turn the SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121 cards on PIM1 to PIM7 to
ON. Then, turn the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121 card on PIM0 to ON
last of all.
• Verify that the ON lamp on the PZ-PW121 card lights up.
• Measure the output voltage: -20V should be observed at GND and -27V
terminals of the PZ-PW121 card. See Figure 2-36.
End
Heat Run Test
Turn the SW1 switch ON. Keep it on for 5 minutes to check for no abnormal voltage. After completing the test, turn OFF the SW1 switch of the PZ-PW121 card on PIM0. Then, turn OFF the
SW1 switches of all the PZ-PW121 cards.
Page 92
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Heat Run Test
Figure 2-36 Confirming Output Voltage
TESTER
DC100V
MJ
MN
ON
-27V
FG
GND
O I
SW1
TO
FRAME GROUND
TERMINAL IN PIM
TO TERMINAL
BLOCK ON BASE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 93
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Battery Connection
BATTERY CONNECTION
WARNING
TURN OFF AC POWER BEFORE CONNECTING BATTERIES.
CAUTION
1. 24V batteries must be used in this system.
2. If battery terminals (+, –) come in contact with the module while connecting the battery cable
to the PZ-PW121 card, the PZ-PW121 card or the BWB may be broken. Therefore, you must
perform work in accordance with the following steps when mounting or removing the batteries.
(1) When mounting batteries:
(a) Connect the battery cable to the batteries.
(b) Mount the batteries into the appointed position of the PIM or the BATTM.
(c) Connect the battery cable to the PZ-PW121 card.
(2)
When removing batteries:
(a) Disconnect the battery cable from the PZ-PW121 card.
(b) Remove the batteries from the PIM or the BATTM.
Recommended Battery
Internal Battery:
YUASA
MATSUSHITA
type NPH-3.2-12
type LCR-12V3.4NE
External Battery:
(BATTM)
YUASA
MATSUSHITA
type NP-24-12B
type LCL-12V-24
Page 94
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Battery Connection
CAUTION
3. Battery Replacement Table and Battery Warnings
The label which shows battery replacement table and battery warnings is attached to the
reverse side of Front Cover for PIM and BATTM.
During the battery installation process, the warning statements must be observed. When replacing batteries, the battery replacement table should be observed in order to increase battery life and insure a safe operation.
PIM/BATTM
LABEL
FRONT COVER
BATTERY REPLACEMENT TABLE
TO PREVENT INJURY AND SKIN BURN,
CAUTION PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING.
INSTALLATION DATE:
AMBIENT
5 ~ 35°C
0 ~ 50°C
0 ~ 50°C
TEMPERATURE (AVERAGE 25°C) (AVERAGE 25°C) (AVERAGE 40°C)
o DO NOT STRIKE A MATCH OR CAUSE A SPARK IN
VICINITY OF BATTERY.
REPLACEMENT
INTERVAL
o PLACE THE EQUIPMENT WELL VENTILATED
3 YEARS
2 YEARS
1 YEAR
o ELECTROLYTE LEAKAGE OR OTHER HAZARDS
MAY RESULT IF THE BATTERY IS NOT REPLACED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFIED INTERVALS.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
AREA.
o DO NOT SHORT.
o REPLACE BATTERY ONLY AFTER BATTERY
GASES HAVE BEEN DISPERSED.
Page 95
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Internal Battery Connection
Internal Battery Connection
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Connect the BATT CA INT cable to the batteries as shown below.
Mount the battery unit (24V DC, 3.2-3.4AH) into the PIM.
Plug the BATT CA INT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121 card.
Secure the batteries and battery cable using tie wraps.
Figure 2-37 Internal Battery Mounting (1 of 2)
DIMENSION OF BATTERY
67 mm
(2.6 inch)
60 mm
(2.4 inch)
PIM
134 mm
(5.3 inch)
TO BATT1
CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121
Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NPH-3.2-12
Matsushita LCR-12V 3.4NE
BATT CA INT
RED
+
–
–
+
BLUE/BLACK
BLACK
INTERNAL BATTERY UNIT
(24V DC, 3.2 TO 3.4AH)
Page 96
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Internal Battery Connection
Figure 2-37 Internal Battery Mounting (2 of 2)
TIE WRAP
–
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
+
+
–
Page 97
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Internal Battery Connection
(5)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA INT and the
PWR CA-A as shown below.
Figure 2-38 Internal Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration
NOTE 1: One Internal Battery unit (24V DC, 3.2-3.4AH) can be mounted in each PIM.
NOTE 2: Internal Batteries are multi-connected for each two PIMs.
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM3
PIM7
PWR CA-A
PWR CA-A
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM2
PIM6
PWR
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM1
PIM5
PWR CA-A
PWR CA-A
PWR
PIM0
Page 98
BATT CA INT
PWR
BATT CA INT
PIM4
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External / BATTM Battery Connection
External / BATTM Battery Connection
(1)
(2)
(3)
Connect the BATT CA EXT cable to the batteries as shown below.
Mount the battery units (24V DC, 24AH per unit) into the Battery Module (BATTM), if the
BATTM required.
Plug the BATT CA EXT connector into the BATT1 connector on the PZ-PW121 card in PIM0
or PIM4.
NOTE:
Screws are attached to the BATTM.
Figure 2-39 Battery Mounting into BATTM
DIMENSION OF BATTERY
175 mm
(6.9 inch)
TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121
IN PIM0/PIM4
125 mm
(4.9 inch)
BATT CA EXT
165 mm
(6.5 inch)
Recommended Batteries
Yuasa NP-24-12B
Matsushita LCL-12V-24
BATTERY UNIT
(24V DC, 24AH)
BATTERY UNIT
(24V DC, 24AH)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 99
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External / BATTM Battery Connection
Figure 2-40 Battery Mounted into BATTM
TO BATT1 CONNECTOR
ON PZ-PW121
IN PIM0/PIM4
BATTM
FRONT
Page 100
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External / BATTM Battery Connection
(3)
When the system is configured with two or more PIMs, connect the BATT CA EXT and the
PWR CA-A as shown below.
Figure 2-41 External/BATTM Battery Connection for Multiple-PIM Configuration
NOTE 1: One pair each of battery unit (24V DC, 24AH) can be housed in a BATTM, for each two
PIMs.
NOTE 2: External Batteries are multi-connected for each four PIMs.
PWR
PWR
PIM3
PIM7
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PWR
PWR
CA-A
PIM2
PIM6
PWR
PWR
PIM1
PIM5
PWR
PWR
PIM4
PIM0
BATT CA EXT
BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
BATT CA EXT
BATTM/
EXTERNAL BATT
Page 101
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Cable Running to MDF
CABLE RUNNING TO MDF
Installation of External MDF
• Secure the external MDF onto the floor or the wall.
• Mount the required MDF components.
• If required, install the cable ducts for the cables to be laid between the MDF and the Main
Equipment. In this case, confirm the locations of the cable holes for the Main Equipment.
Figure 2-42 MDF Cable Hole Location
MODULE
BASE
FRONT
: CABLE HOLE
Page 102
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cable
MDF Cable
To facilitate the termination of the 25 pair cables (MDF cables) from the system to the MDF shown
in Figure 2-43, the length of each cable to be used should be predetermined according to the
distance between the MDF and the system. Each cable should be labeled at both ends using a
cable number or cable designation as shown in Table 2-2.
Figure 2-43 MDF Cable
CHAMP CONNECTOR
TO PIM
TWISTED 25 PAIR CABLES
TO MDF
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 103
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cable
Table 2-2 MDF Cables for each PIM
FROM
MODULE
CONNECTION
CABLE
NUMBER
PIM 0
LTC0
1
LTC1
2
0 LTC1
LTC2
3
0 LTC2
LTC3
4
0 LTC3
LTC0
5
LTC1
6
1 LTC1
LTC2
7
1 LTC2
LTC3
8
1 LTC3
LTC0
9
LTC1
10
2 LTC1
LTC2
11
2 LTC2
LTC3
12
2 LTC3
LTC0
13
LTC1
14
3 LTC1
LTC2
15
3 LTC2
LTC3
16
3 LTC3
LTC0
17
LTC1
18
4 LTC1
LTC2
19
4 LTC2
LTC3
20
4 LTC3
LTC0
21
LTC1
22
5 LTC1
LTC2
23
5 LTC2
LTC3
24
5 LTC3
PIM 1
PIM 2
PIM 3
PIM 4
PIM 5
Page 104
TO
CABLE
DESIGNATION
MDF
0 LTC0
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
MDF
1 LTC0
2 LTC0
3 LTC0
4 LTC0
5 LTC0
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cable
Table 2-2 MDF Cables for each PIM (Continued)
FROM
MODULE
CONNECTION
CABLE
NUMBER
PIM 6
LTC0
25
LTC1
26
6 LTC1
LTC2
27
6 LTC2
LTC3
28
6 LTC3
LTC0
29
LTC1
30
7 LTC1
LTC2
31
7 LTC2
LTC3
32
7 LTC3
PIM 7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
TO
CABLE
DESIGNATION
MDF
6 LTC0
MDF
7 LTC0
Page 105
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Cable Running to External MDF
Cable Running to External MDF
(1)
When using the cable hole of the BASE, bring the MDF cable up to the Main Equipment
through the cable hole of the BASE.
(2)
When using the cable hole of the PIM, make the cable hole on the right side of PIM. Then,
bring the MDF cable up to PIM 0 through the cable hole of the BASE, and bring the MDF
cable up to the other PIM through the cable hole (right side) of each PIM.
Figure 2-44 Making Cable Hole on PIM
FRONT
CUT OFF THE PLATE.
Page 106
FILE THE PROJECTIONS.
PUT IN THE EDGINGS.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Cable Running to External MDF
(3)
Connect the champ connector of each MDF cable to the LTC connector located on the PIM
using the screws provided, as shown below.
(4)
Secure the MDF cables to the PIM using tie wraps.
Figure 2-45 Cable Running to the External MDF (1 of 2)
(a) Using cable hole of BASE
PIM3
LTC CONNECTOR
PIM2
CHAMP CONNECTOR
PIM1
PIM0
BATTM
TO MDF
FRONT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 107
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Cable Running to External MDF
Figure 2-45 Cable Running to the External MDF (2 of 2)
(b) Using cable hole of PIM
PIM 3
TO MDF
LTC CONNECTOR
PIM 2
CHAMP CONNECTOR
TO MDF
PIM 1
TO MDF
PIM 0
TO MDF
BATTM
FRONT
Page 108
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Termination Of Cables On MDF
TERMINATION OF CABLES ON MDF
Cable Connection to MDF
Connect the cables to the MDF by referring to Figure 2-46 and Table 2-3.
Figure 2-46 Card Slots and the LTC Connectors
PFT
MP12/FP12
LT11/AP11/FP11
LT10/AP10
LT09/AP09
LT08/AP08
LT07/AP07
LT06/AP06
LT05/AP05
LT04/AP04
LT03/AP03
LT02/AP02
LT01/AP01
LT00/AP00
VM
PIM0 - 7
AC/DC
PWR
LTC1
LTC0
LTC3
LTC2
BWB
DC/DC
PWR
FRONT
Table 2-3 LTC Connector Accommodation
LTC CONNECTOR
CARD SLOT NUMBER
LTC0
LT00 - LT02/AP00 - AP02
LTC1
LT03 - LT05/AP03 - AP05
LTC2
LT06 - LT08/AP06 - AP08
LTC3
LT09 - LT11/AP09 - AP11
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
REMARKS
Page 109
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Location of Each LEN
Location of Each LEN
This figure shows the relationship between each Line Equipment Number (LEN) and each Card
Slot Number (LT Number).
• LEN 000 - 363 (PIM0 - 3)
• LEN 400 - 763 (PIM4 - 7)
Page 110
Page 111
Page 112
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Location of Each LEN
• LEN 000 - 363 (PIM 0 - 3)
Location of each LEN
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
XYY
(LTXX)
LEN
(LINE EQUIPMENT NUMBER)
X : PIM NUMBER
YY : PORT NUMBER
CARD SLOT NUMBER
PIM 3
307
306
305
304
303
302
301
300
(LT00)
315
314
313
312
311
310
309
308
(LT01)
323
322
321
320
319
318
317
316
(LT02)
331
330
329
328
327
326
325
324
(LT03)
339
338
337
336
335
334
333
332
(LT04)
347
346
345
344
343
342
341
340
(LT05)
355
354
353
352
351
350
349
348
(LT06)
363
362
361
360
359
358
357
356
(LT07)
339
338
337
336
(LT08)
347
346
345
344
(LT09)
355
354
353
352
(LT10)
363
362
361
360
(LT11)
PIM 2
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
(LT00)
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
(LT01)
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
(LT02)
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
(LT03)
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
(LT04)
247
246
245
244
243
242
241
240
(LT05)
255
254
253
252
251
250
249
248
(LT06)
263
262
261
260
259
258
257
256
(LT07)
239
238
237
236
(LT08)
247
246
245
244
(LT09)
255
254
253
252
(LT10)
263
262
261
260
(LT11)
PIM 1
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
(LT00)
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
(LT01)
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
(LT02)
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
(LT03)
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
(LT04)
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
(LT05)
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
(LT06)
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
(LT07)
139
138
137
136
(LT08)
147
146
145
144
(LT09)
155
154
153
152
(LT10)
163
162
161
160
(LT11)
PIM 0
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
000
(LT00)
015
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
(LT01)
023
022
021
020
019
018
017
016
(LT02)
031
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
(LT03)
039
038
037
036
035
034
033
032
(LT04)
047
046
045
044
043
042
041
040
(LT05)
055
054
053
052
051
050
049
048
(LT06)
063
062
061
060
059
058
057
056
(LT07)
039
038
037
036
(LT08)
047
046
045
044
(LT09)
055
054
053
052
(LT10)
063
062
061
060
(LT11)
*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 111
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Location of Each LEN
• LEN 400 - 763 (PIM 4 - 7)
Location of each LEN
PIM 7
707
706
705
704
703
702
701
700
(LT00)
715
714
713
712
711
710
709
708
(LT01)
723
722
721
720
719
718
717
716
(LT02)
731
730
729
728
727
726
725
724
(LT03)
739
738
737
736
735
734
733
732
(LT04)
747
746
745
744
743
742
741
740
(LT05)
755
754
753
752
751
750
749
748
(LT06)
763
762
761
760
759
758
757
756
(LT07)
739
738
737
736
(LT08)
747
746
745
744
(LT09)
755
754
753
752
(LT10)
763
762
761
760
(LT11)
PIM 6
607
606
605
604
603
602
601
600
(LT00)
615
614
613
612
611
610
609
608
(LT01)
623
622
621
620
619
618
617
616
(LT02)
631
630
629
628
627
626
625
624
(LT03)
639
638
637
636
635
634
633
632
(LT04)
647
646
645
644
643
642
641
640
(LT05)
655
654
653
652
651
650
649
648
(LT06)
663
662
661
660
659
658
657
656
(LT07)
639
638
637
636
(LT08)
647
646
645
644
(LT09)
655
654
653
652
(LT10)
663
662
661
660
(LT11)
PIM 5
507
506
505
504
503
502
501
500
(LT00)
515
514
513
512
511
510
509
508
(LT01)
523
522
521
520
519
518
517
516
(LT02)
531
530
529
528
527
526
525
524
(LT03)
539
538
537
536
535
534
533
532
(LT04)
547
546
545
544
543
542
541
540
(LT05)
555
554
553
552
551
550
549
548
(LT06)
563
562
561
560
559
558
557
556
(LT07)
539
538
537
536
(LT08)
547
546
545
544
(LT09)
555
554
553
552
(LT10)
563
562
561
560
(LT11)
PIM 4
407
406
405
404
403
402
401
400
(LT00)
415
414
413
412
411
410
409
408
(LT01)
423
422
421
420
419
418
417
416
(LT02)
431
430
429
428
427
426
425
424
(LT03)
439
438
437
436
435
434
433
432
(LT04)
447
446
445
444
443
442
441
440
(LT05)
455
454
453
452
451
450
449
448
(LT06)
463
462
461
460
459
458
457
456
(LT07)
439
438
437
436
(LT08)
447
446
445
444
(LT09)
455
454
453
452
(LT10)
463
462
461
460
(LT11)
*
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
Page 112
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
This figure shows the LTC Connector Pin Arrangement.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)
PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)
Page 114
Page 115
Page 116
Page 117
Page 118
Page 119
Page 120
Page 121
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 113
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM0 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
LTC0
1
26
2
27
3
28
4
29
5
30
6
31
7
32
8
33
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25 MJ 50 MN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN000
001
002
003
LT00/AP00
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
LT01/AP01
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
LT02/AP02
020
021
022
LEN023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN048
049
050
051
LT06/AP06
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
LT07/AP07
060
061
062
063
036
037
LT08/AP08*
038
LEN039
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN024
025
LT03/AP03
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
LT04/AP04
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
LT05/AP05
042
043
044
045
046
LEN047
LEN044
045
LT09/AP09*
046
047
052
053
LT10/AP10*
054
055
060
061
LT11/AP11*
062
LEN063
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
Page 114
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM1 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN100
101
102
103
LT00/AP00
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
LT01/AP01
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
LT02/AP02
120
121
122
LEN123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN148
149
150
151
LT06/AP06
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
LT07/AP07
160
161
162
163
136
137
LT08/AP08*
138
LEN139
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN124
125
LT03/AP03
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
LT04/AP04
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
LT05/AP05
142
143
144
145
146
LEN147
LEN144
145
LT09/AP09*
146
147
152
153
LT10/AP10*
154
155
160
161
LT11/AP11*
162
LEN163
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 115
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM2 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN200
201
202
203
LT00/AP00
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
LT01/AP01
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
LT02/AP02
220
221
222
LEN223
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN248
249
250
251
LT06/AP06
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
LT07/AP07
260
261
262
263
236
237
LT08/AP08*
238
LEN239
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN224
225
LT03/AP03
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
LT04/AP04
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
LT05/AP05
242
243
244
245
246
LEN247
LEN244
245
LT09/AP09*
246
247
252
253
LT10/AP10*
254
255
260
261
LT11/AP11*
262
LEN263
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
Page 116
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM3 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN300
301
302
303
LT00/AP00
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
LT01/AP01
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
LT02/AP02
320
321
322
LEN323
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN348
349
350
351
LT06/AP06
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
LT07/AP07
360
361
362
363
336
337
LT08/AP08*
338
LEN339
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN324
325
LT03/AP03
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
LT04/AP04
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
LT05/AP05
342
343
344
345
346
LEN347
LEN344
345
LT09/AP09*
346
347
352
353
LT10/AP10*
354
355
360
361
LT11/AP11*
362
LEN363
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 117
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM4 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN400
401
402
403
LT00/AP00
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
LT01/AP01
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
LT02/AP02
420
421
422
LEN423
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN448
449
450
451
LT06/AP06
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
LT07/AP07
460
461
462
463
436
437
LT08/AP08*
438
LEN439
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN424
425
LT03/AP03
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
LT04/AP04
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
LT05/AP05
442
443
444
445
446
LEN447
LEN444
445
LT09/AP09*
446
447
452
453
LT10/AP10*
454
455
460
461
LT11/AP11*
462
LEN463
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
Page 118
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM5 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN500
501
502
503
LT00/AP00
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
LT01/AP01
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
LT02/AP02
520
521
522
LEN523
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN548
549
550
551
LT06/AP06
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
LT07/AP07
560
561
562
563
536
537
LT08/AP08*
538
LEN539
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN524
525
LT03/AP03
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
LT04/AP04
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
LT05/AP05
542
543
544
545
546
LEN547
LEN544
545
LT09/AP09*
546
547
552
553
LT10/AP10*
554
555
560
561
LT11/AP11*
562
LEN563
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 119
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM6 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN600
601
602
603
LT00/AP00
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
LT01/AP01
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
LT02/AP02
620
621
622
LEN623
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN648
649
650
651
LT06/AP06
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
LT07/AP07
660
661
662
663
636
637
LT08/AP08*
638
LEN639
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN624
625
LT03/AP03
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
LT04/AP04
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
LT05/AP05
642
643
644
645
646
LEN647
LEN644
645
LT09/AP09*
646
647
652
653
LT10/AP10*
654
655
660
661
LT11/AP11*
662
LEN663
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
Page 120
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
• PIM7 (LTC0 - LTC3)
LTC Connector Pin Arrangement
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC0
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN700
701
702
703
LT00/AP00
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
LT01/AP01
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
LT02/AP02
720
721
722
LEN723
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN748
749
750
751
LT06/AP06
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
LT07/AP07
760
761
762
763
736
737
LT08/AP08*
738
LEN739
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
LTC3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
LEN724
725
LT03/AP03
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
LT04/AP04
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
LT05/AP05
742
743
744
745
746
LEN747
LEN744
745
LT09/AP09*
746
747
752
753
LT10/AP10*
754
755
760
761
LT11/AP11*
762
LEN763
* In Slot 08-11, only 4-port line/trunk cards are mountable. When 8-port cards are mounted in Slot 04-07, only
application processor cards are mountable in Slot 08-11.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 121
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cross Connections
MDF Cross Connections
This table shows the cross connections on the MDF for LTC0 - LTC3.
Table 2-4 LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
CO
LDT
2-W 4-W
E&M E&M
DID
SLT
8COT 4COT 2LDT 2ODT 2ODT AUC 4DIT 8LC 4LC AUC
26
WH-BL
GN
T0
T0
T0
T0
TxT0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
1
BL-WH
RD
R0
R0
R0
R0
TxR0 R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
27
WH-OR
BK
T1
T1
T1
RcvT0 T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
2
OR-WH
YL
R1
R1
R1
RcvR0 R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
28
WH-GN
GN
T2
T2
T1
TxT1
T2
T2
T2
3
GN-WH
RD
R2
R2
R1
TxR1
R2
R2
R2
29
WH-BR
BK
T3
T3
RcvT1
T3
T3
T3
4
BR-WH
YL
R3
R3
RcvR1
R3
R3
R3
30
WH-SL
GN
5
SL-WH
31
1
T4
T4
RD
R4
R4
RD-BL
BK
T5
T5
6
BL-RD
YL
R5
R5
32
RD-OR
GN
T6
T6
7
OR-RD
RD
R6
R6
33
RD-GN
BK
T7
T7
8
GN-RD
YL
R7
R7
Page 122
NOTE
1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cross Connections
Table 2-4 LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection (Continued)
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
CO
LDT
2-W 4-W
E&M E&M
DID
SLT
8COT 4COT 2LDT 2ODT 2ODT AUC 4DIT 8LC 4LC AUC
34
RD-BR
GN
T0
T0
T0
T0
TxT0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
9
BR-RD
RD
R0
R0
R0
R0
TxR0 R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
35
RD-SL
BK
T1
T1
T1
T1 RcvT0 T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
10
SL-RD
YL
R1
R1
R1
R1 RcvR0 R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
36
BK-BL
GN
T2
T2
TxT1
T2
T2
T2
11
BL-BK
RD
R2
R2
TxR1
R2
R2
R2
37
BK-OR
BK
T3
T3
RcvT1
T3
T3
T3
12
OR-BK
YL
R3
R3
RcvR1
R3
R3
R3
38
BK-GN
GN
13
GN-BK
RD
39
BK-BR
BK
2
NOTE
1
T4
T4
R4
R4
T5
T5
R5
R5
14
BR-BK
YL
40
BK-SL
GN
T6
T6
15
SL-BK
RD
R6
R6
41
YL-BL
BK
T7
T7
16
BL-YL
YL
R7
R7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 123
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cross Connections
Table 2-4 LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection (Continued)
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
CO
LDT
2-W 4-W
E&M E&M
DID
SLT
8COT 4COT 2LDT 2ODT 2ODT AUC 4DIT 8LC 4LC AUC
42
YL-OR
GN
T0
T0
T0
T0
TxT0
T0
T0
T0
T0
T0
17
OR-YL
RD
R0
R0
R0
R0
TxR0 R0
R0
R0
R0
R0
43
YL-GN
BK
T1
T1
T1
RcvT0 T1
T1
T1
T1
T1
18
GN-YL
YL
R1
R1
R1
RcvR0 R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
44
YL-BR
GN
T2
T2
T1
TxT1
T2
T2
T2
19
BR-YL
RD
R2
R2
R1
TxR1
R2
R2
R2
45
YL-SL
BK
T3
T3
RcvT1
T3
T3
T3
20
SL-YL
YL
R3
R3
RcvR1
R3
R3
R3
46
VI-BL
GN
21
BL-VI
RD
47
VI-OR
BK
3
NOTE
2
T4
T4
R4
R4
T5
T5
R5
R5
22
OR-VI
YL
48
VI-GN
GN
T6
T6
23
GN-VI
RD
R6
R6
49
VI-BR
BK
T7
T7
24
BR-VI
YL
R7
R7
50
VI-SL
MN*
25
SL-VI
MJ*
* PIN No. 50, 25 in PIM0 is connected to external indication equipment for major card minor
alarm.
NOTE 1: PIN No. 46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 2: PIN No. 46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC2 and LTC3 cannot be used.
Page 124
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cross Connections
Table 2-5 LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
2 wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON
8DLC 4DLC 2DLC
4 wire
EXT. EXT.
Digital
SMARTCON KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
(SN610
EXT. MOH/
NOTE 3
ATTCON) RELAY BGM
2DLCC
DK00 4COT
DTI
26
WH-BL
GN
T0
T0
T0
RA0
K1
T
RA
1
BL-WH
RD
R0
R0
R0
TA0
K0
R
RB
27
WH-OR
BK
T1
T1
T1
RB0
K3
T
TA
2
OR-WH
YL
R1
R1
R1
TB0
K2
R
TB
28
WH-GN
GN
T2
T2
RA1
K5
T
3
GN-WH
RD
R2
R2
TA1
K4
R
29
WH-BR
BK
T3
T3
RB1
K7
T
4
BR-WH
YL
R3
R3
TB1
K6
R
30
WH-SL
GN
5
SL-WH
RD
R4
31
RD-BL
BK
T5
6
BL-RD
YL
32
RD-OR
GN
T6
7
OR-RD
RD
R6
33
RD-GN
BK
T7
8
GN-RD
YL
R7
1
NOTE
1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
T4
R5
Page 125
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cross Connections
Table 2-5 LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information (Continued)
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
2 wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON
8DLC 4DLC 2DLC
4 wire
EXT. EXT.
Digital
SMARTCON KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
(SN610
EXT. MOH/
NOTE 3
ATTCON) RELAY BGM
2DLCC
DK00 4COT
DTI
34
RD-BR
GN
T0
T0
T0
RA0
K1
T
RA
9
BR-RD
RD
R0
R0
R0
TA0
K0
R
RB
35
RD-SL
BK
T1
T1
T1
RB0
K3
T
TA
10
SL-RD
YL
R1
R1
R1
TB0
K2
R
TB
36
BK-BL
GN
T2
T2
RA1
K5
T
11
BL-BK
RD
R2
R2
TA1
K4
R
37
BK-OR
BK
T3
T3
RB1
K7
T
12
OR-BK
YL
R3
R3
TB1
K6
R
38
BK-GN
GN
13
GN-BK
RD
R4
39
BK-BR
BK
T5
14
BR-BK
YL
40
BK-SL
GN
T6
15
SL-BK
RD
R6
41
YL-BL
BK
T7
16
BL-YL
YL
R7
Page 126
2
NOTE
1
T4
R5
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MDF Cross Connections
Table 2-5 LTC0 - LTC3 MDF Cross Connection Information (Continued)
TYPE OF INTERFACE
PIN
RUNNING STATION
SLOTS
CABLE CABLE
2 wire Dterm/
SMARTCON/
DSSCON/
DESKCON
8DLC 4DLC 2DLC
4 wire
EXT. EXT.
Digital
SMARTCON KEY/ PAGE/
TRK
(SN610
EXT. MOH/
NOTE 3
ATTCON) RELAY BGM
2DLCC
DK00 4COT
DTI
42
YL-OR
GN
T0
T0
T0
RA0
K1
T
RA
17
OR-YL
RD
R0
R0
R0
TA0
K0
R
RB
43
YL-GN
BK
T1
T1
T1
RB0
K3
T
TA
18
GN-YL
YL
R1
R1
R1
TB0
K2
R
TB
44
YL-BR
GN
T2
T2
RA1
K5
T
19
BR-YL
RD
R2
R2
TA1
K4
R
45
YL-SL
BK
T3
T3
RB1
K7
T
20
SL-YL
YL
R3
R3
TB1
K6
R
46
VI-BL
GN
21
BL-VI
RD
R4
47
VI-OR
BK
T5
22
OR-VI
YL
48
VI-GN
GN
T6
23
GN-VI
RD
R6
49
VI-BR
BK
T7
24
BR-VI
YL
R7
50
VI-SL
MN*
25
SL-VI
MJ*
*
3
NOTE
2
T4
R5
PIN No.50, 25 in PIM0 are connected to external indication equipment for major card minor
alarm.
NOTE 1: PIN No. 46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 2: PIN No. 46, 21 to 49, 24 on LTC2 and LTC3 cannot be used.
NOTE 3: For the Digital Trunk Interface card, use the different LTC connector from the analog
line/trunk card. The digital line should be separated from the analog line.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 127
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Installation of Peripheral Equipment
INSTALLATION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Table 2-6 Peripheral Equipment and Card List
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
CIRCUIT CARD
REFERENCE
Page
Analog C.O. Trunk
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
Page 129
Tie Line Trunk
PN-2LDT
PN-2ODT
Page 130
DID Trunk
PN-AUC
PN-4DIT
Page 135
Digital Trunk Interface
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC
PZ-M542/PZ-M557 [For Others/Australia]
Page 137
Single Line Telephone
PN-4LC/PN-8LC
PN-AUC
Page 144
Dterm/DSS Console
PN-2DLC
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
Page 146
SN716 DESKCON
PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
Page 148
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON
PN-2DLC/PN-4DLC/PN-8DLC
Page 158
Day/Night Mode Change by
External Key
PN-DK00/PN-CP14
Page 168
External TAS Indicator
PN-DK00/PN-CP14
Page 169
Paging Equipment
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-DK00/PN-CP14
Page 172
External Tone
Source/Announcement
Machine
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-TNTA
PN-DK00/PN-CP14
Page 175
External BGM Source
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-TNTA
PN-DK00/PN-CP14
Page 180
Power Failure Transfer
PN-2COT/PN-4COT/PN-6COT/PN-8COT
PN-AUC
Page 182
Power Failure Transfer
PN-8PFTB
PN-8LC
PN-8COT
Page 185
Alarm Display Panel
PN-CP14
Page 190
Built-in SMDR
PN-CP14
Page 191
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/
Hotel Printer
PN-AP00-B
Page 194
Page 128
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)
Analog C.O. Trunk (COT)
Figure 2-47 MDF Cross Connection for C.O. Trunk Card
PIM0
LTC0
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R6
7
7
T6
32
32
R7
8
8
T7
33
33
PN-8COT
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
•
•
•
LT00
LEN006
LEN007
MDF
TO C.O. LINE
(No. 6)
(No. 7)
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
•
•
•
LEN006
LEN007
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
LTC0 (P)
1
2
•
•
•
R0
R1
•
•
•
26
27
•
•
•
T0
T1
•
•
•
26
27
•
•
•
T0
T1
•
•
•
1
2
•
•
•
R0
R1
•
•
•
7
8
R6
R7
32
33
T6
T7
32
33
T6
T7
7
8
R6
R7
Page 129
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)
• LD Trunk (PN-2LDT)
Figure 2-48 MDF Cross Connection for LD Trunk Card
PIM0
LTC0
PN-2LDT
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
MDF
TO TIE LINE
TO TIE LINE
LT00
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
Page 130
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)
• 4W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)
When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached
with the PN-2ODT card.
NOTE:
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN2ODT card.
Figure 2-49 MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card (1 of 2)
PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE
PN-2ODT
CN1
2
08
MDF
07
06
J
05
04 M1
03 E1
LEN001
(No. 1)
(M)
02 M0
01 E0
LEN000
(No. 0)
(E)
LTC0
LT00
J
LEN000
LEN001
P
TxR0
1
1
(Tx Ring)
TxT0
26
26
(Tx Tip)
RcvR0
2
2
(Rcv Ring)
RcvT0
27
27
(Rcv Tip)
TxR1
3
3
TxT1
28
28
RcvR1
4
4
RcvT1
29
29
(No. 0)
(No. 1)
TO TIE LINE
1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 131
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)
Figure 2-49 MDF Cross Connection for 4W E&M Trunk Card (2 of 2)
1 LTC CONNECTOR
2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1 TxR0 26 TxT0
2 RcvR0 27 RcvT0
3 TxR1 28 TxT1
4 RcvR1 29 RcvT1
LTC0 (P)
26 TxT0
27 RcvT0
28 TxT1
29 RcvT1
CN1
1 TxR0
2 RcvR0
3 TxR1
4 RcvR1
LEN001
LEN000
Page 132
M1
E1
M0
E0
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)
• 2W E&M Trunk (PN-2ODT)
When connecting the E and M, make the installation cable by using the connector attached
with the PN-2ODT card.
NOTE:
Both No. 0 and No. 1 circuits must be set to same purpose (2-wire or 4-wire) in one PN2ODT card.
Figure 2-50 MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card (1 of 2)
PIM0
INSTALLATION CABLE
PN-2ODT
CN1
2
08
MDF
07
06
J
05
04
M1
03
E1
02
M0
01
E0
LEN001
(No. 1)
(M)
LEN000
(No. 0)
(E)
LTC0
LT00
J
LEN000
LEN001
P
R0
1
1
(Ring)
T0
26
26
(Tip)
R2
3
3
T2
28
28
(No. 0)
(No. 1)
TO TIE LINE
1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 133
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT)
Figure 2-50 MDF Cross Connection for 2W E&M Trunk Card (2 of 2)
2 CN1 CONNECTOR
(FRONT CONNECTOR)
1 LTC CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
3
4
R0
R2
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T2
26
27
28
29
T0
T2
1
2
3
4
CN1
R0
R2
LEN001
LEN000
Page 134
M1
E1
M0
E0
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
DID Trunk (AUC/DIT)
DID Trunk (AUC/DIT)
• 2 Line DID Trunk (PN-AUC)
Figure 2-51 MDF Cross Connection for 2 Line DID Trunk Card
PIM0
LTC0
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
PN-AUC
LEN000 (No. 0)
LEN001 (No. 1)
MDF
TO DID LINE
TO DID LINE
LT00
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
3
4
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
R0
R1
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
Page 135
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
DID Trunk (AUC/DIT)
• 4 Line DID Trunk (PN-4DIT)
Figure 2-52 MDF Cross Connection for 4 Line DID Trunk Card
PIM0
LTC0
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
R2
3
3
T2
28
28
R3
4
4
T3
29
29
PN-4DIT
LEN000
LEN001
MDF
(No. 0)
TO DID LINE
(No. 1)
TO DID LINE
LT00
LEN002
(No. 2)
LEN003
(No. 3)
TO DID LINE
TO DID LINE
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
LEN002
LEN003
Page 136
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
T2
T3
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
R2
R3
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
• DTI for using a twisted pair cable (PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC)
When using a twisted-pair cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the MDF as shown below.
Figure 2-53 DTI Cable Connection via MDF
PBX
BWB
PN24DTA/
PN30DTC
MDF
CSU
TWISTED-PAIR
CABLE
(SHIELD TYPE)
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR
MAX. 200 m (655 ft.) .......... 24-DTI
MAX. 400 m (1310 ft.)......... 30-DTI
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 137
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
Figure 2-54 MDF Cross Connection for DTI Card
PIM 0
LTC1
PN-24DTA/PN-30DTC
J
P
MDF
RECEIVE
AP05
RA
17
17
RA
RB
42
42
RB
TA
18
18
TA
TB
43
43
TB
TO CSU
TRANSFER
LTC1 (J)
Page 138
LTC1 (P)
17
RA
42
RB
42
RB
17
RA
18
TA
43
TB
43
TB
18
TA
19
44
44
19
20
45
45
20
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
• DTI for using a coaxial cable (PN-30DTC/PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
When using an coaxial cable, connect the cable to a CSU via the CONN (PZ-M542/PZM557) card as shown below.
Figure 2-55 DTI Cable Connection via CONN Card
PBX
BWB
CSU
PN30DTC
COAXIAL CABLE
CONN (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
LTC0/LTC1/LTC2/LTC3 CONNECTOR
MAX. 6dB loss at 1024 kHz
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 139
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
Figure 2-56 Coaxial Cable Connection for DTI Card
PIM 0
PN-30DTC
LTC1
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
P
J
RECEIVE
AP05
RA
17
17
RB
42
42
TA
18
18
TB
43
43
RCV
TO CSU
TRS
SEND
1
1 LTC1 CONNECTOR
2 COAXIAL CONNECTOR
LTC1 (J)
Page 140
2
LTC1 (P)
17
RA
42
RB
42
RB
17
RA
18
TA
43
TB
43
TB
18
TA
19
44
44
19
20
45
45
20
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
• Mounting of CONN Card (PZ-M542/PZ-M557)
STEP 1: When using LTC0 or LTC2 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, take off
the PLATE from the PZ-M542/PZ-M547 card. Then, overturn the PLATE and secure it
to the card with screws.
When using LTC1 or LTC3 connector to mount the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card, skip STEP
1.
NOTE: The PLATE and screws are attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.
Figure 2-57 Connection of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 and PLATE
PLATE
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
SCREW
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 141
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
STEP 2: Connect the LT connector on the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the LTC connector on
BWB in PIM.
NOTE: Two PZ-M542/PZ-M557 cards can not be mounted on the adjoining LTC connectors.
LTC0 and LTC2/LTC0 and LTC3/LTC1 and LTC3 are mountable.
Figure 2-58 Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card (1 of 2)
PIM
LTC CONNECTOR
LTC1
LTC0
LTC3
LTC
2
When connecting to LTC1 or LTC3
When connecting to LTC0 or LTC2
LTC CONNECTOR
LT CONNECTOR
PZ-M547/PZ-M557
Page 142
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
STEP 3: Secure the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER with one screw.
NOTE 1: Screw is attached to the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card.
NOTE 2: Before securing the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card to the PIM CARD STOPPER, all cards
should be mounted on the card slots and the PIM CARD STOPPER should be secured
with screws. See “MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS” on Page 199.
Figure 2-58 Mounting of PZ-M542/PZ-M557 Card (2 of 2)
PZ-M542/PZ-M557
CARD STOPPER
SCREW
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 143
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC)
Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC)
• Standard Line (PN-8LC/PN-4LC)
Figure 2-59 MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Standard Line)
PIM0
LTC0
J
PN-8LC
MDF
P
ROSETTE
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
•
•
•
LT00
LEN006
LEN007
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R6
7
7
T6
32
32
R7
8
8
T7
33
33
(No. 6)
(No. 7)
LTC0 (J)
Page 144
TO SINGLE
LINE TELEPHONE
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
R0
R1
26
27
T0
T1
26
27
T0
T1
1
2
R0
R1
•
•
•
LEN006
LEN007
•
•
•
7
8
•
•
•
R6
R7
•
•
•
32
33
•
•
•
T6
T7
•
•
•
32
33
•
•
•
T6
T7
•
•
•
7
8
•
•
•
R6
R7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Single Line Telephone (LC/AUC)
• Long Line (PN-AUC)
Figure 2-60 MDF Cross Connection for Single Line Telephone (Long Line)
PIM0
LTC0
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
PN-AUC
LEN000 (No. 0)
LEN001 (No. 1)
MDF
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
TO SINGLE LINE
TELEPHONE
(FOR LONG LINE)
LT00
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
3
4
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
R0
R1
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
Page 145
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)
• Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)
Figure 2-61 MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Standard Line)
PIM0
LTC0
PN-8DLC
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
•
•
•
LT00
LEN006
LEN007
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R6
7
7
T6
32
32
R7
8
8
T7
33
33
MDF
TO Dterm /
DSS CONSOLE
MODULAR CONNECTOR
(No. 6)
(No. 7)
LTC0 (J)
Page 146
ROSETTE
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
R0
R1
26
27
T0
T1
26
27
T0
T1
1
2
R0
R1
•
•
•
LEN006
LEN007
•
•
•
7
8
•
•
•
R6
R7
•
•
•
32
33
•
•
•
T6
T7
•
•
•
32
33
•
•
•
T6
T7
•
•
•
7
8
•
•
•
R6
R7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Dterm/DSS Console (DLC)
• Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)
Figure 2-62 MDF Cross Connection for Dterm/DSS Console (Long Line)
PIM0
LTC0
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
LEN000 (No. 0)
MDF
ROSETTE
TO Dterm /
DSS CONSOLE
LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
29
28
27
26
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
Page 147
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
(1)
MDF Cross Connection
• PN-PW00 Power Option
Figure 2-63 MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON
(PN-PW00 Power Option)
NOTE:
When using PN-PW00 card, make the installation cable by using the connector attached with the PN-PW00 card.
INSTALLATION CABLE
TO SN716 DESKCON
MDF
PIM0
E
NOTE
6
J
P
R0
1
1
4
T0
26
26
3
PN-8DLC/4DLC
LEN000 (No. 0)
LTC0
ROSETTE
5
–48V
2
1
E
–48V
LT00
NOTE
MODULAR CONNECTOR
PN-PW00
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
–48V
E
–48V
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
1
R0
26
LTC0 (P)
T0
26
T0
1
R0
E
LTC0 (P)
26 –48V
27 –48V
Page 148
1 Grd
2 Grd
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
• AC Adapter Power Option
Figure 2-64 MDF Cross Connection for SN716 DESKCON
(AC Adapter Power Option)
PIM0
PN-8DLC/4DLC
LEN000
(No. 0)
LTC0
MDF
ROSETTE
6
J
P
R0
1
1
4
T0
26
26
3
TO SN716 DESKCON
5
2
1
LT00
MODULAR CONNECTOR
–24V AC ADAPTER
TO COMMERCIAL
AC OUTLET
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
1
R0
26
LTC0 (P)
T0
26
T0
1
R0
Page 149
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
(2)
Contents
Static Sensitive
Installation of SN716 DESKCON
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 1: Insert the handset cord through the hole on the side of the handset support as shown
below.
CAUTION
Handle the cord with care. Be careful not to snap a hook on the modular plug of the cord
when you insert the cord through the hole.
Figure 2-65 Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (1 of 4)
(01)
(02)
(03)
LDN
TIE
Busy
ATND
NANS
Recall
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
EMG
BV
TRKSL
Call Park
SC
SVC
(04)
PAGE
REC
Start
Mute
Night
(21)
Position Busy
Cancel
L6 (12)
Volume
(24)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
DEST
SRC
L5 (11)
Talk
L4 (10)
L3 (09)
(19)
(22)
(20)
Release
Hold
Answer
(26)
(23)
(25)
L2 (08)
L1 (07)
HANDSET CORD
(DESK CONSOLE SIDE)
Page 150
(HANDSET SIDE)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Figure 2-65 Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (2 of 4)
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
HOLE
SIDE VIEW
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 151
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 2: Insert the modular plug into the HAND H/S 0 jack, and trail the cord along the groove
at the bottom of the console.
Figure 2-65 Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (3 of 4)
HANDSET CORD
HAND
H/S 0
H/S 1
Page 152
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 3: Fit the three small holes of the handset support fitting to the projections on the bottom
of the console, and secure the fitting using three screws.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the console, do not tighten the screws too tightly.
Figure 2-65 Mounting of Handset Support to SN716 DESKCON (4 of 4)
HANDSET CORD
PROJECTION
PROJECTION
HANDSET SUPPORT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 153
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 4: Plug the headset into the modular jack (H/S 0 or H/S 1) located at the bottom of the
console, if required.
Figure 2-66 Headset Installation for SN716 DESKCON
HAND
H/S 0
H/S 1
Page 154
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 5: Plug the line cord into the modular jack (LINE) located at the bottom of the console. For
the MDF cross connection for the SN716 DESKCON. Refer to “MDF Cross Connection
for SN716 DESKCON (PN-PW00 Power Option)” on Page 148.
Figure 2-67 Cable Connection to SN716 DESKCON
LINE CORD
PAGE REC LINE
3P
PBX
MDF
MODULAR
TERMINAL
3P
1P
DLC
SN716 DESKCON
2P
PW00
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 155
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 6: When using an AC-DC ADAPTER for power supply, plug the AC-DC ADAPTER into the
“12-24V DC” terminal located at the rear of the console.
Figure 2-68 AC-DC ADAPTER Connection to SN716 DESKCON
12~24V DC
RS-232
AC-DC ADAPTER
Page 156
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN716 DESKCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 7: When using the PN-PW00 card for power supply, connect the PN-PW00 card and
SN716 DESKCON by Installation cable as shown below and in Figure 2-63.
Figure 2-69 PN-PW00 Card Connection to the SN716 DESKCON
PZ-PW121
PN-PW00
CONN CONNECTOR
PIM
TO DESKCON
NOTE:
The PN-PW00 card occupies the adjoining left side (smaller number) slot because of
its two-card structure.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 157
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
(1)
SN610 ATTCON
• Standard Line (PN-2DLCC)
Figure 2-70 MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Standard Line)
PIM0
LTC0
J
PN-2DLCC
MDF
P
ROSETTE
LEN000 (No. 0)
TA0
1
1
RED
RA0
26
26
GREEN
TB0
2
2
YELLOW
RB0
27
27
BLACK
TA1
3
3
RA1
28
28
TB1
4
4
RB1
29
29
TO SN610 ATTCON
LT00
LEN001 (No. 1)
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
Page 158
1
2
3
4
TA0
TB0
TA1
TB1
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
RA0
RB0
RA1
RB1
26
27
28
29
RA0
RB0
RA1
RB1
1
2
3
4
TA0
TB0
TA1
TB1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
• Long Line (PN-4DLCF)
Figure 2-71 MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Long Line) (1 of 2)
NOTE:
When using the No. 2 and No. 3 circuits of PN-4DLCF card, make the installation cable
by using the connector attached with the PN-4DLCF card.
INSTALLATION CABLE
PIM0
PN-4DLCF
CN1
2
MDF
MODULAR CONNECTOR
08
RB3
07
TB3
06
RA3
05
TA3
GREEN
04
RB2
YELLOW
03
TB2
02
RA2
01
TA2
LEN001
TO SN610
ATTCON
BLACK
LEN002 (No. 2)
LTC0
LT00
LEN000
ROSETTE
RED
LEN003 (No. 3)
(No. 0)
(No. 1)
J
P
TA0
1
1
RED
RA0
26
26
GREEN
TB0
2
2
YELLOW
RB0
27
27
BLACK
TA1
3
3
RA1
28
28
TB1
4
4
RB1
29
29
TO SN610
ATTCON
1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 159
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
Figure 2-71 MDF Cross Connection for SN610 ATTCON (Long Line) (2 of 2)
1
LTC CONNECTOR
2
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
3
4
TA0
TB0
TA1
TB1
26
27
28
29
CN1 CONNECTOR
LTC0 (P)
RA0
RB0
RA1
RB1
26
27
28
29
RA0
RB0
RA1
RB1
1
2
3
4
CN1
TA0
TB0
TA1
TB1
RB3
LEN003
TB3
RA3
TA3
RB2
LEN002
TB2
RA2
TA2
Page 160
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
(2)
SN708/709/712 ATTCON
• Standard Line (PN-8DLC/PN-4DLC)
Figure 2-72 MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712 ATTCON (Standard Line)
PIM0
LTC0
PN-8DLC
LEN000
(No. 0)
LEN001
(No. 1)
•
•
•
LT00
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
•
•
•
LEN006
(No. 6)
LEN007
(No. 7)
•
•
•
MDF
•
•
•
R6
7
7
T6
32
32
R7
8
8
T7
33
33
•
•
•
LEN006
LEN007
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
1
2
•
•
•
7
8
R0
R1
•
•
•
R6
R7
TO SN708/709/712 ATTCON
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
ROSETTE
26
27
•
•
•
32
33
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
•
•
•
T6
T7
26
27
•
•
•
32
33
T0
T1
•
•
•
T6
T7
1
2
•
•
•
7
8
R0
R1
•
•
•
R6
R7
Page 161
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
• Long Line (PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN)
Figure 2-73 MDF Cross Connection for SN708/709/712 ATTCON (Long Line)
PIM0
LTC0
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN
LEN000 (No. 0)
J
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
R1
2
2
T1
27
27
3
3
28
28
4
4
29
29
MDF
ROSETTE
TO SN708/709/712 ATTCON
LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00
MODULAR CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN001
Page 162
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
T0
T1
26
27
28
29
T0
T1
1
2
3
4
R0
R1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
(3)
Contents
Static Sensitive
Installation of SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 1: To provide the console with the headset in place of the handset, unplug the modular
cord from the handset and then plug the modular cord to the Jack Set.
Figure 2-74 Jack Set Installation for SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON
SN610/708/709/712
ATTCON
MODULAR
CORD
JACK SET
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 163
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 2: Set the switch located inside the console according to the type of headset/handset connected. Refer to next page.
Figure 2-75 Switch Setting on the SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (1 of 2)
• Slide the directory out of the way.
Then insert a flat screw driver’s blade into the notched opening and apply light upward pressure until the access panel is clear of the front lip. At the same time apply pressure (toward
you) at the rear of the pedestal to move the access panel.
ACCESS PANEL
DIRECTORY
Page 164
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
Figure 2-75 Switch Setting on the SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (2 of 2)
• Set the switch according to the type of headset/handset connected.
C: Carbon Type Handset/Headset
S: SUPRA Headset
D: Dterm Type Handset
• Replace the directory and access panel.
SWITCH
D
S
C
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 165
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 3: Plug the line cord into the modular jack located at the bottom of the console.
For the MDF cross connection refer to the following;
• SN610 ATTCON (Page 158)
• SN708/709/712 ATTCON (Page 161)
Figure 2-76 Cable Connection to SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON
LINE CORD
PBX
MODULAR
TERMINAL
1P
MDF
1P
1P
DLC
SN708/709/712 ATTCON
PBX
MODULAR
TERMINAL
2P
MDF
2P
2P
2DLCC/
4DLCF
SN610 ATTCON
Page 166
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON (DLC)
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
STEP 4: Screw the handset support onto the bottom of the console as shown below.
Figure 2-77 Mounting of Handset Support to SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON
HANDSET
SUPPORT
SN610/708/709/712 ATTCON
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 167
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)
Day/Night Mode Change by External Key (DK/MP)
Figure 2-78 MDF Cross Connection for Day/Night Mode Change by External Key
• When using PN-DK00
PIM0
LTC0
PN-DK00
J
P
MDF
TO KEYS
K0
1
1
K0
K1
26
26
K1
K2
2
2
K2
K3
27
27
K3
K4
3
3
K4
K5
28
28
K5
K6
4
4
K6
K7
29
29
K7
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7
26
27
28
29
K1
K3
K5
K7
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
• When using DK on PN-CP14
PBX
External Key
PN-CP14
Page 168
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External TAS Indicator (DK/MP)
External TAS Indicator (DK/MP)
(1)
Connection Outline
Figure 2-79 External TAS Indicator Connection Outline
• When using PN-DK00
PBX
TAS Indicator with Battery
MDF
PN-DK00
IND
PZ-PW121
G
G
PBX
PN-DK00
MDF
TAS Indicator with Battery
(Ground Start)
IND
• When using DK on PN-CP14
PBX
TAS Indicator with Battery
(Ground Start)
PN-CP14
IND
PBX
TAS Indicator with Battery
PN-CP14
IND
MDF
PZ-PW121
G
G
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 169
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External TAS Indicator (DK/MP)
(2)
MDF Cross Connection
• When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery
Figure 2-80 MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery
PIM0
LTC0
PN-DK00
J
P
K0
1
1
K1
26
26
K2
2
2
K3
27
27
K4
3
3
K5
28
28
K6
4
4
K7
29
29
TAS INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY
MDF
K0
IND
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
PZ-PW121
–27V
G
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
Page 170
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7
26
27
28
29
K1
K3
K5
K7
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External TAS Indicator (DK/MP)
• When using a TAS Indicator with a Battery (Ground Start)
Figure 2-81 MDF Cross Connection for TAS Indicator with Battery (Ground Start)
PIM0
TAS INDICATOR
WITH BATTERY
(GROUND START)
LTC0
PN-DK00
J
P
K0
1
1
K1
26
26
K2
2
2
K3
27
27
K4
3
3
K5
28
28
K6
4
4
K7
29
29
MDF
K0
IND
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
26
27
28
29
LTC0 (P)
K1
K3
K5
K7
26
27
28
29
K1
K3
K5
K7
1
2
3
4
K0
K2
K4
K6
Page 171
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)
(1)
Requirement for Customer-owned Paging Equipment
Input Impedance : 600 ohm
Control Method
: Start - Ground Start NOTE
Stop - Ground Off (Open)
NOTE:
(2)
The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125A.
Connection Outline
Figure 2-82 Paging Equipment Connection Outline (1 of 2)
• When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX
For Amplifier Input
MDF
PN-8COT
Paging Equipment
G
PN-DK00
For Control
PZ-PW121
G
G
Page 172
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)
Figure 2-82 Paging Equipment Connection Outline (2 of 2)
• When using PN-8COT and DK on PN-CP14
PBX
For Amplifier Input
MDF
PN-8COT
Paging Equipment
G
PN-CP14
For Control
PZ-PW121
G
G
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 173
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Paging Equipment (COT and DK/MP)
(3)
MDF Cross Connection
Figure 2-83 MDF Cross Connection for Paging Equipment
MDF
PIM0
J
LTC0
P
K0
1
1
K1
26
26
K2
2
2
K3
27
27
K4
3
3
K5
28
28
K6
4
4
K7
29
29
R0
9
9
T0
34
34
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R6
15
15
T6
40
40
R7
16
16
Ring
T7
41
41
Tip
PN-DK00
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
PN-8COT
LEN008
(No. 0)
•
•
•
LT01
LEN014
LEN015
PAGING EQUIPMENT
G
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
SPEAKER
(No. 6)
(No. 7)
SPEECH
PATH
CIRCUIT
G
PZ-PW121
G
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
LEN008
LEN009
•
•
•
LEN015
LEN016
Page 174
LTC0 (P)
1
2
3
4
K0
26
27
28
29
26
27
28
29
9
10
•
•
•
R0
R1
•
•
•
34
35
•
•
•
T0
T1
•
•
•
34
35
•
•
•
14
15
R6
R7
40
41
T6
T7
40
41
1
2
3
4
K0
T0
T1
•
•
•
9
10
•
•
•
R0
R1
•
•
•
T6
T7
14
15
R6
R7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)
(1)
Requirement for Customer-owned External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
Output level
: Less than 0 dbm (Adjustable)
Output impedance : Less than 1 kohms (When using PN-4COT/8COT and PN-DK00)
: Less than 10 kohms (When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA)
Control Method
: Start - Ground Start NOTE 1
: Stop - Ground Off (Open)
NOTE 1: The current capacity of relay contact (PN-DK00 card) is 0.125A.
NOTE 2: When connecting the external tone source/announcement machine using the PN4COT/8COT and PN-DK00 cards, an appropriate diode must be installed on the MDF,
as shown in Figure 2-84.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 175
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)
(2)
Connection Outline
Figure 2-84 External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Connection Outline
• When using PN-8COT and PN-DK00
PBX
MDF
PN-8COT
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
Diode *
PN-DK00
* Rating for the Diode
• VR Less than –50V
• IO More than 20mA
• VF Less than 1.0V
• When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA
PBX
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
PN-TNTA
JACK0
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
JACK1
• When using Pin Jack on PN-CP14
PBX
PN-CP14
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine
JACK
Page 176
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)
(3)
MDF Cross Connection
Figure 2-85 MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement
Machine (1 of 2)
MDF
PIM0
J
LTC0
P
K0
1
1
K1
26
26
K2
2
2
K3
27
27
K4
3
3
K5
28
28
K6
4
4
K7
29
29
R0
9
9
T0
34
34
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R6
15
15
T6
40
40
R7
16
16
Ring
T7
41
41
Tip
PN-DK00
LEN000
LT00
LEN002
PN-8COT
LEN008
(No. 0)
•
•
•
LT01
LEN014
LEN015
EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/
ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
K0
G
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
(No. 6)
(No. 7)
SPEECH
PATH
CIRCUIT
PZ-PW121
G
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 177
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)
Figure 2-85 MDF Cross Connection for External Tone Source/Announcement
Machine (2 of 2)
LTC0 (J)
LEN000
LEN002
LEN008
LEN009
•
•
•
LEN015
LEN016
Page 178
LTC0 (P)
1
2
3
4
K0
26
27
28
29
26
27
28
29
9
10
•
•
•
R0
R1
•
•
•
34
35
•
•
•
T0
T1
•
•
•
34
35
•
•
•
14
15
R6
R7
40
41
T6
T7
40
41
1
2
3
4
K0
T0
T1
•
•
•
9
10
•
•
•
R0
R1
•
•
•
T6
T7
14
15
R6
R7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External Tone Source/Announcement Machine (DK/TNT/MP)
• If a D.C. voltage is supplied with the tone from the external tone source/announcement machine, a transformer or coupling capacitor should be used as shown below.
Figure 2-86 Connecting External Tone Source/Announcement Machine Supplied
with D.C.
TRANSFORMER
Ring
CAPACITOR
2µF
SOURCE
R
TO COT
TO PBX
DC
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
Tip
K
EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/
ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00
CAPACITOR
2µF
Ring
SOURCE
R
TO COT
TO PBX
DC
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
Tip
K
TO CONTROL CIRCUIT
FROM PN-DK00
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE/
ANNOUNCEMENT MACHINE
Page 179
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP)
External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP)
The system can connect a maximum of 10 customer-owned BGM sources.
(1)
Connection Outline
Figure 2-87 External BGM Sources Connection Outline
• When using PN-8COT
PN-8COT
MDF
BGM SOURCE
#0
BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE
#1
• When using Pin Jacks on PN-TNTA
PN-TNTA
BGM SOURCE
JACK0
#0
BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE
JACK1
#1
• When using Pin Jack on PN-CP14
PN-CP14
BGM SOURCE
JACK
Page 180
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
External BGM Source (COT/TNT/MP)
(2)
MDF Cross Connection
• When using PN-8COT
Figure 2-88 MDF Cross Connection for External BGM Sources
PIM0
LTC0
PN-8COT
LEN000
LEN001
LT00
LEN007
P
R0
1
1
T0
26
26
0
R1
2
2
BGM SOURCE
T1
27
27
1
#0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
R6
7
7
T6
32
32
R7
8
8
T7
33
33
BGM SOURCE
(No. 0)
(No. 1)
•
•
•
LEN006
MDF
J
(No. 6)
(No. 7)
LTC0 (J)
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
LEN001
1
2
R0
R1
26
27
T0
T1
•
•
•
LEN006
LEN007
•
•
•
7
•
•
•
R6
•
•
•
32
•
•
•
T6
8
R7
33
T7
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
26
T0
1
R0
27
•
•
•
T1
•
•
•
2
•
•
•
R1
•
•
•
32
33
T6
T7
7
8
R6
R7
Page 181
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (AUC)
Power Failure Transfer (AUC)
(1)
Connection Outline
Figure 2-89 PFT Connection Outline (AUC)
PBX
TEL
MDF
MDF
PN-AUC
Page 182
TO C.O. LINE
PN-4COT
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (AUC)
(2)
MDF Cross Connection
Figure 2-90 MDF Cross Connection for PFT (AUC) (1 of 2)
NOTE 1: The No. 2 and No. 3 circuit in the PN-4COT card cannot be used for PFT function.
NOTE 2: When using Ground Start trunks with PFT function, the single line stations must have
a ground sending button and a ground lead must be run to the station.
PIM0
PN-4COT
J
LTC0
P
MDF
C.O.R0
1
1
Ring
C.O.T0
26
26
Tip
C.O.R1
2
2
Ring
C.O.T1
27
27
Tip
3
3
28
28
04
4
4
03
29
29
Sta. R0
9
9
Ring
Sta. T0
34
34
Tip
Sta. R1
10
10
Ring
Sta. T1
35
35
Tip
LEN000 (No. 0)
LEN001 (No. 1)
LT00
TO
C.O. LINE
TO
C.O. LINE
02
01
CN1
PN-AUC
4Q-TW-0.3 CONN CA
LEN008 (No. 0)
LEN009 (No. 1)
TO
STATION
TO
STATION
LT01
04
03
02
01
CN1
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 183
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (AUC)
Figure 2-90 MDF Cross Connection for PFT (AUC) (2 of 2)
LTC0 (J)
Page 184
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
LEN001
1 C.O.R0 26 C.O.T0
2 C.O.R1 27 C.O.T1
26 C.O.T0 1 C.O.R0
27 C.O.T1 2 C.O.R1
LEN008
LEN009
9 Sta.R0 34 Sta.T0
10 Sta.R1 35 Sta.T1
11
36
12
37
34 Sta.T0 9 Sta.R0
35 Sta.T1 10 Sta.R1
36
11
37
12
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)
(1)
Connection Outline
Figure 2-91 PFT Connection Outline (8PFT)
PZ-8PFTB
PBX
TEL
MDF
MDF
PN-8LC
PN-8COT
MDF
MDF
TO C.O.
LINE
NOTE
NOTE:
Using the PN-AUCA card (long line card) instead of the PN-8LC card is not recommended due to the variations from Central Office to the PBX; line quality cannot be assured.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 185
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)
(2)
Installation of PZ-8PFTB
STEP 1: Mount the PZ-8PFTB card into the PFT slot of the PIM.
STEP 2: Connect the champ connectors of 25-pair cables to the PFT0 and PFT1 connectors on
the PZ-8PFTB card as shown below.
Figure 2-92 Connection of 25-Pair Cable and PZ-8PFTB
PFT1 CONNECTOR
CHAMP CONNECTOR ATTACHED TO PZ-8PFTB
PZ-8PFTB
PFT0 CONNECTOR
25-PAIR CABLE
To MDF
(SEE STEP 3)
Page 186
Page 187
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)
STEP 3: Connect the 25-pair cables on the MDF.
• This figure shows the PFT connector pin assignment for each PFT circuit number
(No. 0 - No. 7).
Figure 2-93 PFT Connector Pin Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PFT0
Sta. R0
26
8LC. R0 27
C.O. R0 28
8COT. R0 29
Sta. R1
30
8LC. R1 31
C.O. R1 32
8COT. R1 33
Sta. R2
34
8LC. R2 35
C.O. R2 36
8COT. R2 37
Sta. R3
38
8LC. R3 39
C.O. R3 40
8COT. R3 41
Sta. R4
42
8LC. R4 43
C.O. R4 44
8COT. R4 45
Sta. R5
46
8LC. R5 47
C.O. R5 48
8COT. R5 49
50
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
Sta. T1
8LC. T1
C.O. T1
8COT. T1
Sta. T2
8LC. T2
C.O. T2
8COT. T2
Sta. T3
8LC. T3
C.O. T3
8COT. T3
Sta. T4
8LC. T4
C.O. T4
8COT. T4
Sta. T5
8LC. T5
C.O. T5
8COT. T5
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PFT1
Sta. R6
26
8LC. R6 27
C.O. R6 28
8COT. R6 29
Sta. R7
30
8LC. R7 31
C.O. R7 32
8COT. R7 33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Sta. T6
8LC. T6
C.O. T6
8COT. T6
Sta. T7
8LC. T7
C.O. T7
8COT. T7
No.
o. 6
No.
o. 7
E
–27V
Page 187
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)
• This figure shows MDF cross connection for No. 0 circuit on the PZ-8PFTB.
Figure 2-94 MDF Cross Connection for PFT (8PFT) (1 of 2)
MDF
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
PIM0
J
LTC0
P
LEN000
(No. 0)
R0
T0
1
26
1
26
LEN001
(No. 1)
R1
T1
2
27
2
27
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LEN007
(No. 7)
R7
T7
8
33
8
33
PN-8COT
R0
LEN008
T0
(No. 0)
9
34
9
34
LEN009
(No. 1)
R1
T1
10
35
10
35
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LEN015
(No. 7)
R7
T7
16
41
16
41
PN-8LC
LT00
LT01
TO C.O. LINE
TO STATION
PZ-8PFTB
PFT0
Sta. R0
Sta. T0
1
26
8LC. R0
8LC. T0
2
27
No. 0
C.O. R0
C.O. T0
3
28
8COT. R0
8COT. T0
4
29
P
J
PFT1
PZ-PW121
–27V
24
G
49
E
25
50
P
–27V
J
INSTALLATION CABLE
Page 188
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Power Failure Transfer (8PFT)
Figure 2-94 MDF Cross Connection for PFT (8PFT) (2 of 2)
1
PFT0 CONNECTOR
PFT0 (J)
1
2
3
4
2
Sta. R0
8LC. R0
C.O. R0
8COT. R0
26
27
28
29
PFT0 (P)
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
26
27
28
29
Sta. T0
8LC. T0
C.O. T0
8COT. T0
Sta. R0
8LC. R0
C.O. R0
8COT. R0
TO STATION
TO PN-8LC
TO C.O. LINE
TO PN-8COT
PFT1 CONNECTOR
PFT1 (J)
24
25
3
1
2
3
4
PFT1 (P)
49
50
E
–27V
49
50
E
–27V
24
25
TO PZ-PW121
LTC0 CONNECTOR
LTC0 (J)
LTC0 (P)
LEN000
1
2
3
4
R0
26
27
28
29
T0
26
27
28
29
T0
1
2
3
4
R0
TO PZ-8PFTB
LEN008
9
10
11
12
R0
34
35
36
37
T0
34
35
36
37
T0
9
10
11
12
R0
TO PZ-8PFTB
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 189
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Alarm Display Panel (MP)
Alarm Display Panel (MP)
Figure 2-95 MDF Cross Connection for Alarm Display Panel
ALARM DISPLAY PANEL
PWR
PIM0
MJ
MIN
MDF
LTC0
J
P
MJ
25
25
MN
50
50
PN-CP14
FRONT
PZ-PW121
–27V
G
REAR
LTC0 (J)
1
25
Page 190
LTC0 (P)
26
MJ
50
26
MN
50
1
MN
25
MJ
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Built-in SMDR (MP)
Built-in SMDR (MP)
The MP card provides a RS-232C interface port for SMDR connection.
No.0 Port : Async.: 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
• Direct connection
Connect the SMDR terminal to the RS 0 Port of the PN-CP14 card using the RS RVS-15 (S)
CA-A/RS RVS-4 (S) CA-A/RS RVS-4 (S) CA-C as shown below.
Figure 2-96 SMDR Terminal Direct Connection
PBX
PN-CP14
TO RS-232C
PORT
RS 0
RS RVS-15 (S) CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.)
RS RVS-4 (S) CA-A/RS RVS-4 (S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
SMDR
15 m (49.2 ft.) MAX.
• Connection via MODEM
When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), connect the SMDR terminal to the RS0 Port of the PN-CP14 card through the MODEMs using
the RS NORM-4 (S) CA-A as shown below.
Figure 2-97 SMDR Terminal Connection via MODEMs
PBX
PN-CP14
MODEM
MODEM
2P
TO RS-232C
PORT
RS 0
SMDR
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
MODEM INTERFACE
CABLE (STRAIGHT)
MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 191
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Built-in SMDR (MP)
Figure 2-98 RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A/
RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C
NOTE:
If the SMDR terminal does not send DTR or RTS signal, cut the signal lead marked by
X in the D-Sub connector (SMDR terminal side) as shown in the wiring diagram above.
See Table 2-7.
RS RVS-15 CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A: 15 m (49.2 ft.) MAX.
RS RVS-4 CA-A/RS RVS-4 CA-C/
RS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-4S CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.) MAX.
06D-TXC (1)
15-TXC (2)
06B-RXC
17-RXC
06A-TXC (2)
24-TXC (1)
06A-TXC (2)
06-DSR
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
03-RXD
04B-RXD
02-TXD
04A-RTS
08-DCD
03B-CTS
05-CTS
03A-DSR
NOTE
X
02B-GND
07-GND
02A-DCD
X
01C-LALB
D
06 TXC (1)
Page 192
20-DTR
04-RTS
18-LALB
13
----
12
----
11
----
10
----
C
B
A
09
----
X
RXC
TXC (2)
08
DCD
05
X
DTR
GND
TXD
07
GND
04
(RT)
X
RXD
RTS
06
DSR
03
X
(ST)
CTS
DSR
05
CTS
02
----
X
GND
DCD
04
RTS
01
X
LALB
X
G
03
RXD
02
TXD
01
GND
G: GROUND
25
----
24
TXC (1)
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
LALB
17
RXC
16
----
15
TXC (2)
14
----
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Built-in SMDR (MP)
Figure 2-99 RS NORM-4 CA-A/RS NORM-4S CA-A
See Table 2-7.
4 m (13.1 ft.) MAX.
D
06 TXC (1)
06D-TXC (1)
24-TXC (1)
06B-RXC
17-RXC
06A-TXC (2)
15-TXC (2)
05C-DTR
20-DTR
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
02-TXD
04B-RXD
03-RXD
04A-RTS
04-RTS
03B-CTS
05-CTS
03A-DSR
06-DSR
02B-GND
07-GND
02A-DCD
08-DCD
01C-LALB
18-LALB
C
B
A
13
----
X
RXC
TXC (2)
12
----
05
X
DTR
GND
TXD
11
----
04
(RT)
X
RXD
RTS
10
----
03
X
(ST)
CTS
DSR
09
----
02
----
X
GND
DCD
08
DCD
01
X
LALB
X
G
07
GND
06
DSR
05
CTS
04
RTS
03
RXD
02
TXD
01
GND
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
G: GROUND
25
----
24
TXC (1)
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
LALB
17
RXC
16
----
15
TXC (2)
14
----
Page 193
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)
The PN-AP00-B card provides 4 RS-232C interface ports for SMDR, PMS, MCI, CIS Printer, Hotel Printer.
(1)
SMDR/PMS/MCI (VMS)
• Direct Connection
Connect the terminal to the RS0-RS3 port of the PN-AP00-B card using the RS RVS-15 (S)
CA-A/RS RVS-4 (S) CA-A/RS RVS-4 (S) CA-C as shown below. See also Figure 2-98.
Figure 2-100 SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Direct Connection
PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)
RS0 - RS3
PNAP00-B
TO RS-232C PORT
RS RVS-15 (S) CA-A : 15 m (49.2 ft.)
RS RVS-4 (S) CA-A/RS R VS-4 (S) CA-C: 4 m (13.1 ft.)
SMDR0/SMDR1/
PMS/MCI (VMS)
15 m (49.2 ft.) MAX.
Page 194
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)
• Connection via MODEM
When the cable length between the PBX and the terminal is more than 15 m (49.2 ft), MODEMs are required. Use RS RORM-4(S) CA-A as shown below. See also Figure 2-99.
Figure 2-101 SMDR/PMS/MCI Terminal Connection via MODEMs
INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)
PBX
(PIM0 - PIM7)
RS0 - RS3
2P
PNAP00-B
TO RS-232C PORT
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A:
4m (13.1 ft.)
MODEM
MODEM
SMDR0/SMDR1/
PMS/MCI (VMS)
MORE THAN 15m (49.2 ft.)
MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)
1200 bps (LEASED TYPE)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 195
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)
(2)
CIS Printer/Hotel Printer
• Direct Connection
Connect a maximum of two printers to the PN-AP00-B using the RS PRT-15(S) CA-A as
shown below.
Figure 2-102 Printer Direct Connection
PBX
RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR
PNAP00-B
PRINTER0/PRINTER1
RS PRT-15 CA-A/
RS PRT-15S CA-A : 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MAX. 15 m (49.2 ft.)
• Connection via MODEM
When the cable length between the printer and the PBX is more than 15 m (49.2 ft.), MODEMs are required.
Figure 2-103 Printer Connection via MODEMs
INTERFACE CABLE
(FOR STRAIGHT
CONNECTION)
PBX
RS0-RS3
CONNECTOR
2P
PNAP00-B
MODEM
RS NORM-4 CA-A/
RS NORM-4S CA-A : 4 m (13.1 ft.)
MODEM
PRINTER0/PRINTER1
MORE THAN 15 m (49.2 ft.)
MODEM: FULL DUPLEX (4W)
1200 bps (LEASED TYPE)
Page 196
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)
Figure 2-104 RS PRT-15 CA-A/RS PRT-15S CA-A
See Table 2-7.
MAX. 15 m (49.2 ft.)
05C-DTR
05B-GND
01-GND
05A-TXD
03-RXD
03B-CTS
20-DTR
03A-DSR
02B-GND
D
07-GND
C
B
A
06
TXC
(1)
X
RXC
TXC
(2)
05
X
DTR
GND
04
(RT)
X
03
X
02
----
01
X
13
----
12
----
11
----
TXD
10
----
RXD
RTS
09
----
(ST)
CTS
DSR
08
----
X
GND
DCD
07
GND
G
06
----
LALB
X
G: GROUND
05
----
04
----
03
RXD
02
----
01
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
GND
25
----
24
----
23
----
22
----
21
----
20
DTR
19
----
18
----
17
----
16
----
15
----
14
----
Page 197
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
SMDR/PMS/MCI/CIS Printer/Hotel Printer (AP00)
Table 2-7 RS-232C Connector Layout
SIGNAL-NAME
PIN
SIGNAL
ITU-T
NO. RS-232C JIS C6361
ANOTHER DIRECTION
V.24
MEANING
1
AA
(FG)
101
GND
Frame Ground
2
BA
SD
103
TXD
3
BB
RD
104
RXD
4
CA
RS
105
RTS
5
CB
CS
106
CTS
DCE
Clear to Send
6
CC
DR
107
DSR
DCE
Data Set Ready
7
AB
SG
102
GND
8
CF
CD
109
DCD
DTE
DCE
DTE
Send Data
Receive Data
Request to Send
Signal Ground
DCE
Data Channel Receive Carrier
Detect
9
Not Used
10
Not Used
11
PB
Peripheral Busy
12
SCF
BCD
122
DCE
Backward Channel Receive Carrier
Detect
13
SCB
BCS
121
DCE
Backward Channel Send (OK)
14
SBA
BSD
118
15
DB
ST2
114
16
SBB
BRD
119
17
DD
RT
115
DTE
TXC (2)
RXC
DCE
Send Signal Element Timing
DCE
Backward Channel Receive Data
DCE
Receive Signal Element Timing
18
Not Used
19
SCA
BRS
120
20
CD
ER
108/2
21
CG
SQD
110
22
CE
CI
125
23
CI, CH
SRS
112, 111
24
DA
ST1
113
25
Page 198
Backward Channel Send Data
DTR
RI
TXC (1)
DTE
Backward Channel Send Detect
DTE
Data Terminal Ready
DCE
Data Signal Quality Detect
DCE
Call Indication
–
Data Signal Speed Choice
DCE
Send Signal Element Timing
Not Used
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Mounting Circuit Cards
MOUNTING CIRCUIT CARDS
(1)
Before mounting the circuit cards, confirm the following items.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
• Wrist Strap is connected to Frame Ground.
Handling
Precautions Required
• Switch settings of circuit cards are already completed. See CHAPTER 3.
• The “SW1” switches of all PZ-PW121 cards are turned off.
(2)
Mount circuit cards into their mounting positions according to the “Bay Face Layout” and
“Port Assignment Table” given in the Office Data Programming Manual. See CHAPTER 1
“MOUNTING CONDITIONS OF CIRCUIT CARD” on Page 29.
This figure shows the mounting method of circuit cards.
Figure 2-105 Mounting of Circuit Cards
TO FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
(Page 39)
WRIST STRAP
CARD LABEL
CARD CONTACT SIDE
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CARD FRONT SIDE
Page 199
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Mounting Circuit Cards
(3)
Fix the CARD STOPPER according to the following procedure.
STEP 1: After mounting all circuit cards slide the CARD STOPPER to the left.
STEP 2: Tighten the screws of the CARD STOPPER as shown below.
NOTE:
When sliding the PIM CARD STOPPER, loosen all of the screws securing the PIM
CARD STOPPER and the PZ-M542/PZ-M557 card (the screws need not to be removed).
Figure 2-106 Installation of the CARD STOPPER
CIRCUIT CARD
CARD
STOPPER
CIRCUIT CARD
SCREW
SCREW
Page 200
SLIDE THE CARD
STOPPER TO THE LEFT.
CARD
STOPPER
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
System Initialization
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
There are two methods for System Initialization. The first method is to Clear All
Data, except LEN000 as a CAT terminal, then program the System Data. The
second method is to use the Resident System Program, which causes the system to configure itself automatically to the default settings, wherever the line/
trunk cards are installed.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
NOTE 1: See CHAPTER 3 for MP switch settings. Page 209
NOTE 2: Refer to the Command Manual for default settings on the Resident System Program.
All Clear, Except LEN000 CAT
STEP 1: Turn on the “SW1” switch on all the PZ-PW121 cards.
- The “ON” lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121 cards.
STEP 2: On the MP Card, set SW3 to “B” and press SW1.
STEP 3: When the “MN” lamp on the system is lit, set SW3 to the “0” position and press SW1.
- The operating mode has been changed to the ON LINE mode.
Resident System Program
STEP 1: Mount the line/trunk cards into PIM.
STEP 2: Turn on the “SW1” switch on all the PZ-PW121 cards.
- The “ON” lamp must be lit on all the PZ-PW121 cards.
STEP 3: On the MP card, set SW3 to “C” and press SW1.
- After 30 to 40 seconds, the “MN” lamp turns on.
- The system has loaded the Resident System Program.
NOTE:
If the “MJ” lamp is lit, repeat Step 3.
STEP 4: On the MP card, set SW3 to the “0” position and press SW1.
- The operating mode has been changed to the ON LINE mode.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 201
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
System Data Entry
SYSTEM DATA ENTRY
There are two methods for data entry, using a Customer Administration Terminal
(CAT) or a Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT).
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
NOTE:
For assigning system data, refer to the Command Manual.
CAT
Any Dterm can be assigned as a CAT through programming. The Dterm can still be used as a regular telephone when it is not in CAT mode. If the system is initialized by “C” (Resident System
Program), every Dterm will be able to go into CAT mode. If the system is initialized by “B” (All
Clear), only LEN000 is assigned as a CAT port (the DLC card must be installed in slot LT00).
To use a Dterm as a CAT, follow the procedures shown below.
NOTE:
It is necessary to complete steps 1 through 6 within 4 seconds.
To set CAT mode:
1.
Press TRF or Transfer
2.
Press CNF or Conf
- CNF/Conf lamp flashes
3.
Press *
- CNF/Conf lamp is off
4.
Press TRF or Transfer
5.
Press CNF or Conf
- CNF/Conf lamp flashes
6.
Press #
- CNF/Conf, SPKR/Speaker, FNC/Feature lamps are lit
- “CAT MODE” is displayed on the LCD
7.
Press LNR/SPD or Redial
- “COMMAND = -” is displayed on the LCD
Page 202
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
MAT
To reset CAT mode:
While “COMMAND = -” is displayed on the LCD:
ATTENTION
1.
Lift the handset (off hook)
- SPKR/Speaker lamp turns off.
2.
Restore the handset (on hook)
- CNF/Conf, FNC/Feature lamps turn off.
- LCD returns to clock.
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
MAT
Refer to the MATWorX User Guide.
Cofirming Lamp Indication
After system data entry, confirm proper operation of the system using indicator lamps.
• RUN Lamp Flashing (120 IPM)
Check that the RUN lamps of PN-CP14 card and other application circuit cards are flashing.
• ON Lamps of All PZ-PW121 Cards Lightning
Check that the ON lamps of all the PZ-PW121 cards are lightning and their MJ/MN lamps
have gone out.
• BL Lamps Gone Out
Check that the BL lamps of all the line/trunk circuit cards have gone out. If BL lamps are
flashing, it means that the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or the system data for
this card is not assigned.
For more details of lamp indication, see CHAPTER 3. For information of maintenance servicing
and troubleshooting of the equipment, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 203
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
Operation Test
OPERATION TEST
Confirm the entered system data and hardware, including cable connection, by completing the
following operational tests.
• Basic Connection Test at MDF
Station Line Test (Operator Call from all stations)
Central Office Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
Tie Line Trunk Test (Incoming, Outgoing)
• Service Feature Test
Call Transfer
Step Call
Executive Right of Way (Executive Override)
Call Hold
Call Back
Call Forwarding-All Calls/Don’t Answer (No Answer)/Busy Line
Call Pickup
Station Hunting-Pilot/Circular
Speed Calling-Station/System (Station Speed Dial/System Speed Dial)
Paging Access (External Paging with Meet-me)
Announcement Service
Other selected features
NOTE:
Page 204
Feature names in parentheses are for North America.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
System Data Save
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
After system data entry, save the system data to floppy diskette. Refer to “MATWorX Users
Guide” for the operation of system data save.
CLEANING AND VISUAL CHECK
Cleaning
Clean the following places:
•
•
•
•
Inside of the main equipment, especially the bottom of the base.
On the Top Cover.
Around the Main Equipment and the MDF.
Keyboard on the Attendant Console.
Visual Check
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check to see if all circuit cards are in their positions correctly.
Check that the cable connections in the PIM are correctly and completely connected, and
the routing of the cables has been done smoothly and neatly.
Check to see if the MAT is removed.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 205
This page is for your notes.
Page 206
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3
LAMP INDICATIONS AND
SWITCH SETTINGS
This chapter explains the meaning of lamp indications and the method
of switch settings of each circuit card used in the system.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 207
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
How To Read This Chapter
HOW TO READ THIS CHAPTER
This chapter explains each circuit card used in this system about the following items. Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the circuit card names within each circuit card category
(Control, Application Processor, and Line/Trunk).
(1)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
The locations of lamps, switches, and connectors of each circuit card are shown by a face
layout.
(2)
Lamp Indications
The name, color, and functions of each indicator lamp equipped on each circuit card are
described in a table.
(3)
Switch Settings
The name, settings, and functions of each switch equipped on each circuit card are
described in a table.
Each switch setting table has a “CHECK” column. Make necessary entries in the CHECK column
during and/or after the system installation and maintenance, and use each table as a reference
for subsequent system maintenance and operations.
Page 208
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
Control Card
CONTROL CARD
The table below shows the control cards explained in this section.
Table 3-1 List of Control Cards
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
X: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
–
Page 210
PN-CP14 (MP)
X
X
PN-CP15 (FP)
X
X
PN-PW00
(EXTPWR)
X
X
PZ-PW121
(AC/DC PWR)
X
X
–
PZ-PW122
(DC/DC PWR)
X
X
–
Page 215
Page 217
Page 219
Page 222
*MB = Make Busy
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 209
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP14 (MP)
PN-CP14 (MP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW3
SW4
RUN
SW1
SW2
CONN
JACK
CLK
VR
DK
JP1
RS1
JP0
RS0
CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
CLK
Green
Remains lit while receiving clock signals to the PLO.
Page 210
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP14 (MP)
Switch Settings
CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (Rotary SW)
0
NOTE 1
0-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
0
On Line
(Call processing is in progress)
2
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
• I/O port: As per CM40 YY=08
3
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
• I/O port: 9600 bps (Fixed)
5
NOTE 2
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
• I/O port: 9600 bps
6
NOTE 2
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
• I/O port: 19200 bps
7
NOTE 2
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
• I/O port: 38400 bps
8
NOTE 2
Off Line (Call processing is stopped)
• I/O port: 57600 bps
B
For clearing the office data
C
For setting the resident system program
1, 4, 9
A, D-F
Not used
(Continued)
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: Only when executing “MP Program Download” in MATWorX, set the SW3 to 5-8.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 211
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP14 (MP)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (Push SW)
SW2
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For initializing CPU
1
OFF
ON
A-law (Australia)
OFF
µ-law (North America)
Selection of PLO0 input
(Phase Locked Oscillator)
• For clock receiver office:
4
3
2
1
SW2-2 SW2-3
ON
2, 3
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5MHz clock
[For PN-24DTA-C/PN-24PRTA]
ON
OFF
192kHz clock
[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC-A/PN-2BRTC]
ON
ON
Not used
• For clock source office:
SW2-3
SW2-2
OFF
OFF
4
ON
When using RS1 port for built-in
MODEM
OFF
When using RS1 port for RS-232C
(Continued)
Page 212
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP14 (MP)
SWITCH NAME
SW4 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
OFF
Not used
2
OFF
Not used
CHECK
Selection of PLO1 input
(Phase Locked Oscillator)
• For clock receiver office:
SW4-3 SW4-4
3, 4
FUNCTION
OFF
OFF
1.5MHz clock
[For PN-24DTA-C/PN-24PRTA]
ON
OFF
192kHz clock
[For PN-BRTA]
OFF
ON
2MHz clock
[For PN-30DTC-A/PN-2BRTC]
ON
ON
Not used
• For clock source office:
SW4-4
SW4-3
OFF
OFF
VR (Rotary SW)
Variable Resistor for External Hold
Tone Source
(0 - 20 Kohms : Clockwise)
20
0
DK (Connector)
02
Ground detection
01
Ground sending
02
01
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 213
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP14 (MP)
SWITCH NAME
JP0 (Jumper pin)
Front
JP1 (Jumper pin)
Front
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
UP
Not used
(Memory backup OFF)
DOWN
For normal operation
(Memory backup ON)
UP
For using internal tone source
DOWN
For using external tone source
CHECK
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Page 214
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP15 (FP)
PN-CP15 (FP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
RUN
COLOR
Green
FUNCTION
Flashes at 120 IPM while the circuit card is operating normally.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 215
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CP15 (FP)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For setting FP No.
0-3
0
1
2
3
NOTE1
0
For mounting this card in PIM0
1
For mounting this card in PIM2
2
For mounting this card in PIM4
3
For mounting this card in PIM6
4-F
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
For normal operation
Not used
1-3
OFF
OFF
For normal operation
ON
4
3
4
2
Not used
1
OFF
ON
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
Page 216
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
08
07
06
05
-48V
-48V
E
E
04
03
02
01
-48V
-48V
E
E
RUN
MB
CONN
TO DESKCON
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
RUN
COLOR
Green
FUNCTION
Remains lit while –48V power is being supplied
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 217
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-PW00 (EXTPWR)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
MB (Toggle SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP
ON
NOTE
DOWN
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
(–48V power off)
For normal operation
(–48V power on)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
Page 218
When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW 301
SW 102
MJ
MN
ON
SW 101
MJ
MN
ON
CN103 (SIGNAL)
CN104
BATT
BATT
SW2
ON
CN1
OFF
SW 1
SW2
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 219
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
MJ
Red
Remains lit when a major trouble occurres or resident system
program is not properly loaded
MN
Yellow
Remains lit when a minor trouble occurres or resident system
program is successfully loaded, or a station line is locked out
ON
Green
Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied
Switch Settings
CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
SW2
CHECK
ON
For turning AC power and the battery on
OFF
For turning AC power and the battery off
ON
OFF
FUNCTION
FORWARD AC INPUT: 90V-132V
100/120V AC
240V AC
BACKWARD AC INPUT: 180V-264V
SW101
(Piano key)
1
OFF
ON
Float charging, for sealed batteries
(Normal Setting).
OPTION: Periodic Equalize charging of external vented batteries.
OFF
Float charging, for vented batteries
only.
ON
1
2
OFF
Not used
2
(Continued)
Page 220
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-PW121 (AC/DC PWR)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW301 (DIP SW)
90V
75V
FUNCTION
ON
CR Voltage: 75Vrms
OFF
CR Voltage: 90Vrms
ON
Frequency: 20 Hz
OFF
Frequency: 25 Hz
CHECK
1
1
OFF
ON
2
25Hz
20Hz
2
SW102
PRESS
MOMENTARILY
To start each PIM on battery power
when AC power is not provided
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 221
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
CONN
ON
SW
CONN connector:
To PWR1 connector on PIM BWB
POWER OUTPUT CABLE (-48V, E):
To PWR0C connector on PIM BWB
Page 222
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-PW122 (DC/DC PWR)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
ON
Green
FUNCTION
Remains lit while the operating power is being supplied
Switch Settings
CAUTION
When the operating power is being supplied to this circuit card, do not plug/unplug this circuit
card into/from its mounting slot.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW
FUNCTION
ON
For turning AC power on
OFF
For turning AC power off
CHECK
ON
OFF
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 223
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
Application Processor Card
APPLICATION PROCESSOR CARD
The table below shows the application cards to be explained in this section.
Table 3-2 List of Application Processor Cards
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
X: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-AP00-A (DBM)
X
X
Page 226
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
X
X
Page 229
PN-AP01 (AP01)
X
X
Page 235
PN-BRTA (BRT)
X
X
Page 238
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
X
X
Page 243
PN-CC01 (ETHER)
X
X
PN-DAIA (DAI)
X
X
Page 252
PN-DAIB (DAI)
X
X
Page 257
PN-DAIC (DAI)
X
X
Page 261
PN-DAID (DAI)
X
X
Page 264
PN-DAIE (DAI)
X
X
Page 270
PN-DAIF (DAI)
X
X
Page 274
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
X
X
Page 278
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
X
X
Page 284
PN-IPTA (IPT)
X
X
Page 290
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
X
X
Page 294
X
Page 248
*MB = Make Busy
Page 224
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
Application Processor Card
Table 3-2 List of Application Processor Cards (Continued)
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
X: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
X
Page 300
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
X
X
PN-4RSTC (CIR)
X
X
Page 302
PN-SC00 (CCH)
X
X
Page 304
PN-SC01 (DCH)
X
X
Page 307
PN-SC03 (ICH)
X
X
Page 310
PN-SC03-A (CSH)
X
X
Page 312
PZ-M537
(EXPMEM)
–
X
–
Page 314
PZ-M542 (CONN)
–
X
X
Page 317
PZ-M557 (CONN)
–
X
X
Page 319
*MB = Make Busy
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 225
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-A (DBM)
PN-AP00-A (DBM)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
J16
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
WE
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1
RS0
SW0
Page 226
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-A (DBM)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
WE
Red
Not used
L0-L3
Green
Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250
0
1 (Port 0)-3 (Port 2)
L3
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 0
Indication of CTS signal status on
Port 0-2
L2
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 1
Indication of DCD signal status on
Port 0-2
L1
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 2
Indication of TXD signal status on
Port 0-2
L0
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 3
Indication of RXD signal status on
Port 0-2
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
F
4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to
be set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
ON
NOTE 2
Not used
UP
DOWN
For make-busy
For normal operation
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 227
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-A (DBM)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
ON
FUNCTION
CHECK
For normal operation
1
OFF
OFF
ON
Not used
For normal operation
2
4
OFF
3
Not used
2
1
ON
ON
For normal operation
3
OFF
Not used
4
OFF
Not used
1-8
OFF
Not used
SW0 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J16
(Jumper pin)
Front
RIGHT
For normal operation
(Memory backup ON)
LEFT
Not used
(Memory backup OFF)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
Page 228
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
CONN
SENSE
RUN
MB
JP0
SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS3
RS2
RS1
JP1
RS0
SW0
SW2
CONN: To CONNR connector on PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 229
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
L0-L3
Green
Second data setting value for CMD001 > 250
0
1 (Port 0)-3 (Port 2)
L3
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 0
Indication of CTS signal status on
Port 0-2
L2
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 1
Indication of DCD signal status on
Port 0-2
L1
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 2
Indication of TXD signal status on
Port 0-2
L0
Indication of transmitting
status of Port 3
Indication of RXD signal status on
Port 0-2
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-4: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
ON
NOTE 2
SW1-4: ON
4
UP
DOWN
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
For make-busy
For normal operation
(Continued)
Page 230
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
ON
Not used
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For normal operation
CHECK
1-3
4, 5
6
NOTE 3
7
NOTE 3
8
NOTE 3
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
Not used
ON
Sets No. 0 Port forcibly in a state
which DSR signal is always provided.
OFF
Receives DSR signal from the DCE
on No. 0 Port.
ON
Sets No. 1 Port forcibly in a state
which DSR signal is always provided.
OFF
Receives DSR signal from the DCE
on No. 1 Port.
ON
Sets No. 2 Port forcibly in a state
which DSR signal is always provided.
OFF
Receives DSR signal from the DCE
on No. 2 Port.
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
ON
For normal operation
OFF
For AP data clearing by CMD100/
CMD101
ON
For normal operation
OFF
For AP data clearing by CMD100/
CMD101
ON
AP No. 4-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1
OFF
4
3
2
2
1
ON
3
4
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 231
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
NOTE 3
CHECK
ON
Sets No. 3 Port forcibly in a state
which DSR signal is always provided.
OFF
Receives DSR signal from the DCE
on No. 3 Port.
ON
Enables the receive clock from the
DCE (Modem) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous. (Clock is received at
the RXC terminal)
OFF
• Uses internal clock as the receive
clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
ON
Enables transmit clock from the
DCE (Modem) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous. (Clock is received at
the TXC (2) terminal.)
OFF
• Uses internal clock as the send
clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
ON
Transmit the send clock from the
DTE (this card) when No. 1 Port is
synchronous. (Clock is transmitted
from the TXC (1) terminal)
OFF
• Not transmit the send clock from
the DTE (this card) when No. 1
Port is synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
ON
When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
OFF
When No. 1 Port is synchronous.
2
3
4
5
FUNCTION
(Continued)
Page 232
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
• Uses internal clock as the receive
clock when No. 1 Port is synchronous.
• When No. 1 Port is asynchronous.
OFF
Enables receive clock from the DCE
(Modem) when No. 1 Port is synchronous. (Clock is received at the
RXC terminal)
6
NOTE 4
7
OFF
8
OFF
JP0 (Jumper SW)
JP1 (Jumper SW)
FUNCTION
Not used
Not used
UP
For normal operation
(Memory backup ON)
DOWN
Not used
(Memory backup OFF)
UP
DOWN
CHECK
Not used
For normal operation
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 3: When the DCE connected to the port does not provide a function to send the DSR signals, set the switch to ON. In this case, the AP00 card cannot recognize the actual state
of the DCE, so that the call records or system messages will not be stored in the mem-
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 233
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
ory buffer on the AP00 card even if the cable is disconnected from the DCE.
When the switch is set to OFF, the call records or system messages will be stored
when the cable is disconnected, and will be sent when the cable is re-connected.
NOTE 4: The use of the external clock (from the distant end) or the internal clock is determined
by the following table:
CLOCK
Page 234
SW2
2
6
External
ON
OFF
Internal
OFF
ON
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP01 (AP01)
PN-AP01 (AP01)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
J19
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
L3
L2
L1
L0
RS0
IP
SW0
Lamp Indications
LAMP NAME
RUN
L0-L3
L3
COLOR
FUNCTION
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
Green
Indication of CTS signal status on RS-232C port.
L2
Indication of DCD signal status on RS-232C port.
L1
Indication of TXD signal status on RS-232C port.
L0
Indication of RXD signal status on RS-232C port.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 235
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP01 (AP01)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
F
4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to
be set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
ON
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
Not used
For make-busy
DOWN
For normal operation
ON
For normal operation
1
OFF
ON
OFF
Not used
For normal operation
2
4
OFF
3
Not used
2
ON
1
ON
For normal operation
3
OFF
Not used
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
4
(Continued)
Page 236
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AP01 (AP01)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (DIP SW)
FUNCTION
ON
Receives RT clock
OFF
Uses internal clock
ON
Receives ST2 clock
OFF
Uses internal clock
ON
Sends ST1 clock
OFF
Not send ST1 clock
OFF
Not used
CHECK
1
ON
1 2 3 4
2
3
4
J19
(Jumper pin)
Front
RIGHT
For normal operation
(Memory backup ON)
LEFT
Not used
(Memory backup OFF)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 237
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-BRTA (BRT)
PN-BRTA (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
B1
B2
D
ALM
SW0
SW1
Page 238
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-BRTA (BRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B1
Green
B1 channel status
ON:
Busy
OFF:
Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B2
Green
B2 channel status
ON:
Busy
OFF:
Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D
Green
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
ALM
Red
Busy
Idle
Transmission line fault status
ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 239
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-BRTA (BRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to
be set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
ON
NOTE 2
SW0 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
Not used
1
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
3
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
For make-busy
DOWN
For normal operation
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO of MP according to
the switch setting of SW0-3.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO of MP card.
ON
Clock signal is sent to the PLO 0 of
MP.
OFF
Clock signal is sent to the PLO 1 of
MP.
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
4
(Continued)
Page 240
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-BRTA (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
For terminating the transmitting side
of channels B1 and B2 with 100
ohms.
OFF
To remove the terminating resistor
on the transmitting side of channels
B1 and B2.
ON
For terminating the receiving side of
channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms.
OFF
To remove the terminating resistor
on the receiving side of channels B1
and B2.
1
2
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 241
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-BRTA (BRT)
NOTE 3: Set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 as follows:
BRT0
BRT1
BRT2
----
BRT11
CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
SW SW
---0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3 0-2 0-3
0-2 0-3
When one
BRT is
provided.
When more
than one BRT
is provided.
ON ON
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at
its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from BRT0 at
its PLO0 input, under normal conditions.
---- OFF ON Should a clock failure occur
with BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from
BRT1.
NOTE 4: When the system is a clock source office, set the SW0-2 and SW0-3 on all the BRT
cards mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.
Page 242
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
B21
B11
D1
ALM1
B20
B10
D0
ALM0
SW11
SW10
SW0
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 243
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
B21
Red
No.1 Circuit B2 channel status
ON:
Busy
OFF:
Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B11
Red
B1 channel status
ON:
Busy
OFF:
Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D1
Green
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
Busy
Idle
ALM1
Red
B20
Red
No.0 Circuit B2 channel status
ON:
Busy
OFF:
Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
B10
Red
B1 channel status
ON:
Busy
OFF:
Idle
Flash (60 IPM): Make Busy
D0
Green
D channel status
ON:
OFF:
ALM0
Page 244
Red
Transmission line fault status
ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
Busy
Idle
Transmission line fault status
ON:
Line fault
OFF:
Normal operation
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
SW11-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW11-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0, SW10
(DIP SW)
ON
1 2
For normal operation
ON
For terminating the transmitting side
of channels B1 and B2 with 100
ohms.
OFF
To remove the terminating resistor
on the transmitting side of channels
B1 and B2.
ON
For terminating the receiving side of
channels B1 and B2 with 100 ohms.
OFF
To remove the terminating resistor
on the receiving side of channels B1
and B2.
1
2
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 245
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW11 (DIP SW)
ON
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
ON
Output clock signals according to
the switch setting of SW11-3.
OFF
Do not output clock signals.
ON
Output clock signals to PLO 0 of MP.
OFF
Output clock signals to PLO 1 of MP.
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1
1 2 3 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
3
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
4
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
Page 246
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2BRTC (BRT)
NOTE 3: The system can supply clock signals from two clock supply routes.
In normal condition, the system synchronizes to the clock signals supplied on the PLO
0 of MP card via the Back Wiring Board, and if the clock signals are failed, the clock
supply route takes over to PLO1 automatically. Set SW11-2 and SW11-3 as follows.
BRT0
BRT1
BRT2
----
BRT11
CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW
SW SW
---11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3 11-2 11-3
11-2 11-3
When one BRT
is provided.
When more
than one BRT
is provided.
ON
ON
REMARKS
ON
MP card will receive the clock
signal from No.0 circuit of
BRT0 at its PLO0 input.
Should a clock failure occure
with No.0 circuit, MP card will
switch to No. 1 circuit of
BRT0.
ON
MP card will receive the clock
signal from BRT0 at its PLO0
input, under normal conditions.
Should a clock failure occure
with both No.0 and No.1 circuits of BRT0, MP card will
switch to the PLO1 input
which gets clock from BRT1.
ON OFF OFF ON
----
OFF ON
NOTE 4: When the system is a clock source office, set the SW11-2 and SW11-3 on all the BRT
cards mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the BRT card which receives a source clock signals into PIM0.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 247
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CC01 (ETHER)
PN-CC01 (ETHER)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1
SW2
RUN
MB
LINK
XMT
RCV
RVP
ERR
10BASE-T
IP
Page 248
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CC01 (ETHER)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 60 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when link is established.
XMT
Green
Remains lit when it is transmitting the data.
RCV
Green
Remains lit when it is receiving the data.
RVP
Green
Remains lit only when it is receiving the data with its own IP
address.
ERR
–
Not used
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 1
DOWN
For normal operation
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 249
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CC01 (ETHER)
SWITCH
NAME
SW1 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NOTE 2
SW1-5 (D11)
SW1-6 (D10)
SW1-7 (D9)
SW1-8 (D8)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1 (D15)
ON
2 (D14)
ON
3 (D13)
ON
4 (D12)
OFF
5 (D11)
6 (D10)
7 (D9)
8 (D8)
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
1 (D7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 (D6)
NOTE 2
3 (D5)
4 (D4)
5 (D3)
6 (D2)
7 (D1)
8 (D0)
Page 250
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON:0 OFF:1
MAC ADDRESS
SWITCH SETTING
00004CA4 X X X X
(HEX)
Fixed
SW2-5 (D3)
SW2-6 (D2)
SW2-7 (D1)
SW2-8 (D0)
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
SW2-1 (D7)
SW2-2 (D6)
SW2-3 (D5)
SW2-4 (D4)
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
SW1-5 (D11)
SW1-6 (D10)
SW1-7 (D9)
SW1-8 (D8)
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
SW1-1 (D15)
SW1-2 (D14)
SW1-3 (D13)
SW1-4 (D12)
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CC01 (ETHER)
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 2: Each equipment must have a unique MAC address to distinguish between systems.
Therefore, when more than one PBX is installed in the same network, assign the lower
4 digits of the following MAC address by SW1 and SW2 to prevent duplicate addresses.
00004CA4
Fixed
XX XX (HEX)
According to the switch setting of SW2 (D7-D0)
According to the switch setting of SW1 (D15-D8)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 251
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIA (DAI)
PN-DAIA (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW1
SW2
BUS
SW3
PCM1
PCM0
JPS
JPR
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment
signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
–
Not used
PWR
–
Not used
BL
Red
Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Flashes while FP data downloading.
Page 252
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIA (DAI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
3
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
0
Not used
1
FP No. 1
2
FP No. 2
3
FP No. 3
4–F
Not used
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
No clock supply to PLO 0
ON
For supplying 1.5MHz clock to
PLO 1
OFF
No clock supply to PLO 1
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
NOTE 3
1
For normal operation
For supplying 1.5MHz clock to
PLO 0
4
2
For make-busy
ON
1
NOTE 3
OFF
3
CHECK
FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the
DAIA card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAIA card
and the opposite DAIB card as one Firmware Processor.
1
2
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
ON
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 253
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIA (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHECK
ON
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 48kbps
OFF
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 64kbps
ON
DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi
Frame
OFF
DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi
Frame
ON
Line code: AMI with ZCS
OFF
Line code: B8ZS
1
ON
FUNCTION
2
3
ON
Setting of control signal time slot
SWITCH NUMBER
4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
4
5
6
7
8
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS23
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
8
OFF
(Continued)
Page 254
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIA (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1
OFF
ON
2
FUNCTION
Set the equalizer according to the
cable length between the system
and the CSU.
SW
-1
SW
-2
SW
-3
ON
ON
ON
0 - 40m
(0-131.2ft.)
ON
ON
OFF
40 - 80m
(131.2-262.5ft.)
ON
OFF
ON
80 - 120m
(262.5-394ft.)
ON
OFF OFF
120 - 160m
(394-525ft.)
OFF
ON
160 - 200m
(525-656ft.)
OFF
ON
3
CHECK
OFF
ON
CABLE
LENGTH
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
OFF
Always set to OFF
Right
For mounting this card on PIM1 PIM7
Left
JPR (Jumper pin)
For mounting this card on PIM0
Right
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is provided.
Left
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is not provided.
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 255
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIA (DAI)
NOTE 3: When clock source office signal is supplied via the line between the main site and the
remote site, set the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAIA cards
(DAIA0, DAIA1) must be mounted in PIM0.
DAIA0
CONDITIONS
DAIA1
DAIA2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
REMARKS
One DAIA card
is provided.
ON
OFF
–
–
–
–
The clock signal is
sent to PLO0 of MP
card via supply route
0 (DAIA0).
Two or three
DAIA cards are
provided.
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
The clock signal supply route is automatically changed to the
route 1 (DAIA1), if a
transmission line failure occurs on the
supply route 0.
NOTE 4: The time slot number 0, 20, 21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22) cannot be used for control signal.
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAIB card.
Page 256
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIB (DAI)
PN-DAIB (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
BL
SW1
SW2
BUS
SW3
JPS
JPR
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment
signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
–
Not used
BL
Red
Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Flashes while FP data downloading.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 257
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIB (DAI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
0
FUNCTION
CHECK
Always set to 0
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
ON
1-F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
DOWN
NOTE 1
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
For normal operation
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
3
2
1
ON
(Continued)
Page 258
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIB (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CHECK
ON
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 48kbps
OFF
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 64kbps
ON
DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi
Frame
OFF
DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi
Frame
ON
Line code: AMI with ZCS
OFF
Line code: B8ZS
1
ON
FUNCTION
2
3
ON
Setting of control signal time slot
SWITCH NUMBER
4
OFF
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
4
5
6
7
8
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS23
NOTE 2, NOTE 3
8
OFF
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 259
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIB (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1
OFF
ON
2
FUNCTION
Set the equalizer according to the
cable length between the system
and the CSU.
SW
-1
SW
-2
SW
-3
ON
ON
ON
0 - 40m
(0-131.2ft.)
ON
ON
OFF
40 - 80m
(131.2-262.5ft.)
ON
OFF
ON
80 - 120m
(262.5-394ft.)
ON
OFF OFF
120 - 160m
(394-525ft.)
OFF
ON
160 - 200m
(525-656ft.)
OFF
ON
3
CHECK
OFF
ON
CABLE
LENGTH
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
OFF
Always set to OFF
UP
Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is provided.
DOWN
Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is not provided.
UP
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is provided.
DOWN
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is not provided.
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 2: Time slot number 0, 20, 21, and 22 (TS0/20/21/22) can not be used for control signal.
NOTE 3: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAIA card.
Page 260
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIC (DAI)
PN-DAIC (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
RUN
MB
LINK
RED
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW2
SW1
TBUS
SW3
RBUS
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when the following connection are normal.
• Control channel link between the DAIA card and DAIB card.
• Connection between the opposite DAIC card.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RED
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss or Frame Alignment
signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
–
Not used
PWR
–
Not used
BL
–
Not used
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 261
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIC (DAI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
For normal operation
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
1
OFF
Not used
ON
DTI frame configuration: 12-Multi
Frame
OFF
DTI frame configuration: 24-Multi
Frame
ON
Line code: AMI with ZCS
OFF
Line code: B8ZS
4
OFF
Not used
5
OFF
Not used
6
OFF
Not used
7
OFF
Not used
8
OFF
Not used
4
3
2
1
ON
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
3
(Continued)
Page 262
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIC (DAI)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (DIP SW)
ON
ON
1
1 2 3 4
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the equalizer according to the
cable length between the system
and the CSU.
OFF
ON
2
SW
-1
SW
-2
SW
-3
ON
ON
ON
0 - 40m
(0-131.2ft.)
ON
ON
OFF
40 - 80m
(131.2-262.5ft.)
ON
OFF
ON
80 - 120m
(262.5-394ft.)
ON
OFF OFF
120 - 160m
(394-525ft.)
OFF
ON
160 - 200m
(525-656ft.)
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
CABLE
LENGTH
OFF OFF OFF Signal is not sent
ON
When mounting this card on remote
site.
OFF
When mounting this card on main
site.
4
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
When the power is on, flip MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging
the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 263
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAID (DAI)
PN-DAID (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW1
BUS
SW2
SW3
PCM1
PCM0
SRT
E1Z
JPR
JP
JPS
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
–
Not used
PWR
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
BL
Red
Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Remains lit while FP data downloading.
Page 264
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAID (DAI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
3
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
ON
0
Not used
1
FP No. 1
2
FP No. 2
3
FP No. 3
4-F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
CHECK
FP (Firmware Processor) Number setting for the
DAID card.
By this setting, the system regards the DAID card
and the opposite DAIE card as one Firmware Processor.
1
2
NOTE 1
FUNCTION
For normal operation
ON
For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to
PLO 0
OFF
No clock supply to PLO 0
ON
For supplying 2.0 MHz clock to
PLO 1
OFF
No clock supply to PLO 1
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
1
NOTE 3
OFF
4
2
NOTE 3
3
2
1
ON
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 265
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAID (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
ON
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 48kbps
OFF
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 64kbps
ON
CRC Synchronization Detection
Timer is provided.
OFF
CRC Synchronization Detection
Timer is not provided.
ON
CRC4 Check is provided.
OFF
CRC4 Check is not provided.
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
2
CHECK
3
(Continued)
Page 266
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAID (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
FUNCTION
Setting of control signal time slot
4
ON
SWITCH NUMBER
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
OFF
8
CHECK
4
5
6
7
8
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TS 4
TS 5
TS 6
TS 7
TS 8
TS 9
TS 10
TS 11
TS 12
TS 13
TS 14
TS 15
TS 16
TS 17
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 21
TS 22
TS 23
TS 24
TS 25
TS 26
TS 27
TS 28
TS 29
TS 30
TS 29
TS 30
TS 31
NOTE 4, NOTE 5
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 267
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAID (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW3 (DIP SW)
1
ON
Always set to ON
2
ON
Always set to ON
3
ON
Always set to ON
4
ON
Always set to OFF
ON
1 2 3 4
JPS (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
Right
Balanced transmission: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
Left
TA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Right
Balanced transmission: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
Left
E1Z (Jumper pin)
Right
Left
SRT (Jumper pin)
JP (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
RA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Line impedance:
120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Right
For mounting this card on PIM0
Left
For mounting this card on PIM1PIM7
UP
Line impedance:
120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)
DOWN
CHECK
Line impedance:
75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
Page 268
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAID (DAI)
NOTE 3: When clock source office signal is supplied via the line between the main site and the
remote site, set the SW1-1 and SW1-2 as the following table. In this case, DAID cards
(DAID0, DAID1) must be mounted in PIM0.
DAID0
CONDITIONS
One DAID card
is provided.
Two or three
DAID cards are
provided.
SW
1-1
ON
ON
SW
1-2
OFF
OFF
DAID1
SW
1-1
–
OFF
SW
1-2
–
ON
DAID2
SW
1-1
–
OFF
SW
1-2
REMARKS
–
The clock signal is sent
to PLO0 of MP card via
supply route 0 (DAID0).
OFF
The clock signal supply
route is automatically
changed to the route 1
(DAID1), if a transmission line failure occurs
on the supply route 0.
NOTE 4: The time slot number 0 and 28 (TS0/28) cannot be used for control signal.
NOTE 5: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAIE card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 269
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIE (DAI)
PN-DAIE (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
BL
SW1
BUS
SW2
SW3
JP
E1Z
JPR
JPS
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when a link between this card and a distant office is
normally connected.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
–
Not used
BL
Red
Remains lit while data transmission on control channel (D ch).
Remains lit while FP data downloading.
Page 270
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIE (DAI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
0
FUNCTION
CHECK
Always set to 0
0-F
MB (Toggle SW)
1-F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
For normal operation
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 48kbps
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 64kbps
CRC Synchronization Detection
Timer is provided.
CRC Synchronization Detection
Timer is not provided.
4
3
2
1
ON
SW2 (DIP SW)
1
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
2
OFF
ON
CRC4 Check is provided.
OFF
CRC4 Check is not provided.
3
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 271
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIE (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
FUNCTION
Setting of control signal time slot
4
ON
SWITCH NUMBER
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
ON
OFF
8
CHECK
4
5
6
7
8
TIME SLOT
NUMBER
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TS 1
TS 2
TS 3
TS 4
TS 5
TS 6
TS 7
TS 8
TS 9
TS 10
TS 11
TS 12
TS 13
TS 14
TS 15
TS 16
TS 17
TS 18
TS 19
TS 20
TS 21
TS 22
TS 23
TS 24
TS 25
TS 26
TS 27
TS 29
TS 30
TS 31
NOTE 2, NOTE 3
(Continued)
Page 272
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIE (DAI)
SWITCH NAME
SW3 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
ON
Always set to ON
2
ON
Always set to ON
3
ON
Always set to ON
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
Right
Balanced transmission: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
Left
TA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Right
RA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Left
Balanced transmission: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
Right
Line impedance: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
JPS (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
E1Z (Jumper pin)
Left
SRT (Jumper pin)
Right
Left
CHECK
Line impedance:
120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)
Line impedance:
75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Line impedance:
120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 2: The time slot number 0 and 28 (TS0/28) cannot be used for control signal.
NOTE 3: This setting must be identical with the opposite DAID card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 273
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIF (DAI)
PN-DAIF (DAI)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
RUN
MB
LINK
RMT
LOOP
PWR
BL
SW2
SW1
TBUS
SW3
JPS
RBUS
JP
JPR
CN
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LINK
Green
Remains lit when the following connection are normal.
• Control channel link between the DAID card and DAIE card.
• Connection between the opposite DAIF card.
Goes out after 15 seconds of link disconnection.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm signal from a distant office.
LOOP
–
Not used
PWR
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
(Only on the DAIF card mounted on the Main Site.)
BL
–
Not used
Page 274
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIF (DAI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
Line impedance: 75 ohms
(For coaxial cable)
OFF
Line impedance: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
OFF
2
4
For normal operation
3
2
1
ON
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 275
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIF (DAI)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FUNCTION
ON
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 48kbps
OFF
Control channel signaling data
transmission speed: 64kbps
ON
CRC Synchronization Detection
Timer is provided.
OFF
CRC Synchronization Detection
Timer is not provided.
ON
CRC4 Check is provided.
OFF
CRC4 Check is not provided.
4
OFF
Not used
5
OFF
Not used
6
OFF
Not used
7
OFF
Not used
8
OFF
Not used
1
2
CHECK
3
(Continued)
Page 276
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DAIF (DAI)
SWITCH
NAME
SW3 (DIP SW)
ON
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
ON
Always set to ON
2
ON
Always set to ON
3
ON
Always set to ON
ON
When mounting this card on remote
site.
OFF
When mounting this card on main
site.
Right
TA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Left
Balanced transmission: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
CHECK
1 2 3 4
4
JPS (Jumper pin)
JPR (Jumper pin)
JP (Jumper pin)
Right
RA is grounded on the transmission
line: 75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
Left
Balanced transmission: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
UP
Line impedance:
75 ohms (For coaxial cable)
DOWN
Line impedance:
120 ohms (For twisted-pair cable)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 277
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MAS
MB
SW1
SW0
AISS
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL
JPR0
JPS
JRR1
Page 278
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
errors.
PCM
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM
Red
Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm
from a distant office.
AIS
Red
Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received. The
distant office transmits this signal for a loop-back test.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
: More than 10 channels are busy
: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy
Page 279
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
Not used
4-F
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
CHECK
0-3
F
4
FUNCTION
4
UP
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
For make-busy
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN
For normal operation
(Continued)
Page 280
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
SWITCH NAME
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
FUNCTION
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO 0 input on MP
card.
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO 1 input on MP
card.
ON
Remote loop-back
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Local loop-back (AIS send)
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Set equalizer according to the cable
length between the PBX and the
MDF.
CHECK
ON
3
4
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
8
OFF
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CABLE LENGTH
0-40m (0-131.2ft.)
40-80m (131.2-262.5ft.)
80-120m (262.5-394ft.)
120-160m (394-525ft.)
160-200m (525-656ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 281
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
OFF
Not used
2
OFF
Not used
3
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
CHECK
4
3
2
1
ON
4
NOTE 4
JPR0 (Jumper pin)
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
JPS (Jumper pin)
MAS (Jumper pin)
UP
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is provided.
DOWN
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is not provided.
Right
Line impedance: 100 ohms
Left
Line impedance: 110 ohms
UP
Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is provided.
DOWN
Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is not provided.
UP
DOWN
AISS (Jumper pin)
UP
DOWN
Clock Source
Clock Receiver
AIS signal is sent out when makebusy or power on.
AIS signal is not sent out when
make-busy or power on.
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION-
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
Page 282
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24DTA-C (DTI)
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
DTI0
CONDITIONS
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
DTI1
DTI2
DTI3
DTI4
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
SW
0-1
SW
0-2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from DTI0 at its
PLO0 input.
When one DTI is
provided.
ON OFF
When more than
one DTI is provided.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from DTI0 at its
PLO0 input, under normal
conditions.
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Should a clock failure occur
with DTI0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1
input which gets clock from
DTI1.
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the DTI cards
mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 283
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW
PCM
FRM
MFRM
RMT
MRMT
AIS
BL
JPS
JPR
Page 284
JP
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM when this card is normally operating.
PCM
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM
Red
Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
MFRM
Red
Remains lit when detecting Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss on
time Slot 16.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office
because Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at the
distant office.
MRMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving the alarm from a distant office
because Multi-Frame Alignment signal loss has been detected at
the distant office.
AIS
Red
Remains lit when indicating that the pattern of consecutive “1” is
being received. The distant office transmits this signal for a loopback test distant.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
: More than10 channels are busy
: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 to 10 channels are busy
Page 285
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SENS
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
AP No.
4
FUNCTION
SW-8: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW-8: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
ON
NOTE 2
DOWN
For make-busy
For normal operation
(Continued)
Page 286
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
SWITCH
NAME
SW
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
FUNCTION
CHECK
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO 0 input on MP
card
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO 1 input on MP
card.
ON
Remote loop-back
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Local loop-back (AIS send)
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Transmission line cable:
Coaxial cable (75 ohms)
OFF
Transmission line cable:
Twisted-pair cable (120 ohms)
ON
3
4
5
6
OFF
7
OFF
8
Always set to OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 287
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
SWITCH
NAME
JPS
(Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
UP
DOWN
JPR
(Jumper pin)
JP
(Jumper pin)
UP
FUNCTION
CHECK
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
TA is grounded on the transmission
line (For coaxial cable)
Balanced transmission
(For twisted-pair cable)
DOWN
RA is grounded on the transmission
line (For coaxial cable)
RIGHT
Line impedance: 75 ohms
(For coaxial cable)
LEFT
Line impedance: 120 ohms
(For twisted-pair cable)
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
Page 288
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-30DTC-A (DTI)
NOTE 3: Set the SW-1 and SW-2 as follows:
DTI0
CONDITIONS
When one DTI is
provided.
When more than
one DTI is
provided.
DTI1
DTI2
DTI3
SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
ON
ON
OFF
–
OFF OFF
–
ON
–
–
–
–
REMARKS
MP card will receive the clock
signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input.
MP card will receive the clock
signal from DTI0 at its PLO0
input, under normal conditions.
OFF OFF OFF OFF
Should a clock failure occur
with DTI0, MP card will automatically switch to the PLO1
input which gets from DTI1.
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW-1 and SW-2 on all the DTI cards
mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the DTI card which receives a source clock signal into PIM0.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 289
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-IPTA (IPT)
PN-IPTA (IPT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PZ-M539
PN-IPTA
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
VCT
MODE
IP
CONN
BUSY
SUBOPE3
SUBOPE2
SUBOPE1
SUBOPE0
L3
L2
L1
IP-TX
IP-RX
IP-100M
IP-LINK
IP-COL
IP-LYR
VCT : TO PN-4VCTH
IP CONN :
TO EXTERNAL
LAN INTERFACE
SW2
Page 290
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-IPTA (IPT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
BUSY
Red
When even 1-line ON: Even one line is busy
When even 1-line OFF: All lines are idle
SUBOPE3
Green
Remains lit when Card No.3 of PN-4VCTH is operating.
SUBOPE2
Green
Remains lit when Card No.2 of PN-4VCTH is operating.
SUBOPE1
Green
Remains lit when Card No.1 of PN-4VCTH is operating.
SUBOPE0
Green
Remains lit when Card No.0 of PN-4VCTH is operating.
L3
–
Not used
L2
–
Not used
L1
Green
Remains lit when a loop-back test is in progress.
IP-TX
Green
Remains lit when sending IP data.
IP-RX
Green
Remains lit when receiving IP data.
IP-100M
Green
ON: Ethernet is operating with 100 Mbps.
OFF: Ethernet is operating with 10 Mbps.
IP-LINK
Green
ON: Being connected to IP network (Link established).
OFF: Disconnected to IP network (No link established).
IP-COL
Green
Remains lit when detecting IP data collision.
IP-LYR
Green
Remains lit when IP network is ready to use.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 291
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-IPTA (IPT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
4
AP No.
NOTE 1
SW1-4: ON
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
MB (Toggle SW)
4
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
MODE
(Rotary SW)
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
For make-busy
For normal operation
For setting of the operating mode
0
DOWN
1-F
For normal operation
Not used
(Continued)
Page 292
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-IPTA (IPT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1 (DIP SW)
FUNCTION
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
ON
For normal operation
OFF
Not used
ON
AP Number: 04-15
OFF
AP Number: 20-31
OFF
Not used
CHECK
1
ON
1 2 3 4
2
3
4
SW2 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-8
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 293
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MAS
MB
SW1
SW0
AISS
SW2
JPR0
LC
LPB
CRC
PCM
FRM
RMT
AIS
BL
JPS
JRR1
Page 294
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the
D channel data links connected.
LPB
–
Not used
CRC
Red
Remains lit when detecting Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
errors.
PCM
Red
Remains lit when detecting PCM signal loss.
FRM
Red
Remains lit when detecting Frame Alignment signal loss.
RMT
Red
Remains lit when receiving Frame Alignment signal loss alarm
from a distant office.
AIS
Red
Remains lit when a pattern of consecutive “1” is received.
The distant office transmits this signal for a loop-back test.
BL
Red
B channel status
ON
OFF
Flash (60 IPM)
Flash (120 IPM)
: More than 10 channels are busy
: All channels are idle
: Only one channel is busy
: 2 through 10 channels are busy
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
NOTE 1
CHECK
0-3
Not used
4-F
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
AP No.
SW1-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 295
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
2
NOTE 3
NOTE 4
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
For normal operation
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO 0 input on MP card.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO 0 input on MP
card.
ON
Source clock signal from network is
sent to the PLO 1 input on MP card.
OFF
Source clock signal from network is
not sent to the PLO 1 input on MP
card.
ON
Remote loop-back
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Local loop-back (AIS send)
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Set equalizer according to the cable
length between the PBX and the
MDF.
ON
3
4
5
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
7
OFF
8
OFF
SW0-5 SW0-6 SW0-7
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
CABLE LENGTH
0-40m (0-131.2ft.)
40-80m (131.2-262.5ft.)
80-120m (262.5-394ft.)
120-160m (394-525ft.)
160-200m (525-656ft.)
Signal is not sent
Not used
(Continued)
Page 296
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
OFF
Not used
2
OFF
Not used
3
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
OFF
Always set to OFF
CHECK
4
3
2
1
ON
4
NOTE 4
SW2 (DIP SW)
OFF
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[North America only for AT&T]
2
ON
Deletion of Area Code on
International Outgoing call
OFF
No deletion of Area Code on
International Outgoing call
[Australia/Other countries]
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
5
OFF
Always set to OFF
6
OFF
Always set to OFF
7
OFF
Always set to OFF
8
OFF
Always set to OFF
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 297
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
SWITCH NAME
JPR0 (Jumper pin)
JPR1 (Jumper pin)
JPS (Jumper pin)
MAS (Jumper pin)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
CHECK
UP
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is provided.
DOWN
Neutral grounding on the receiving
line is not provided.
Right
Line impedance: 100 ohms
Left
Line impedance: 110 ohms
UP
Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is provided.
DOWN
Neutral grounding on the transmitting line is not provided.
UP
DOWN
AISS (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
UP
DOWN
Clock Source
Clock Receiver
AIS signal is sent out when makebusy or power on.
AIS signal is not sent out when
make-busy or power on.
(Continued)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
Page 298
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-24PRTA (PRT)
NOTE 3: Set SW0-1 and SW0-2 as follows:
PRT0
PRT1
PRT2
PRT3
PRT4
CONDITIONS SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW
0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2 0-1 0-2
When one PRT
ON OFF
is provided.
When more
than one PRT
is provided.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
REMARKS
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0
at its PLO0 input.
MP card will receive the
clock signal from PRT0
at its PLO0 input, under
normal conditions.
Should a clock failure
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
occur with PRT0, MP
card will automatically
switch to the PLO1
input which gets clock
from PRT1.
NOTE 4: When the PBX is a clock source office, set the SW0-1 and SW0-2 on all the PRT cards
mounted in PIM0 to “OFF”.
NOTE 5: Mount the PRT card which receives a source clock signal into PIM 0.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 299
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW
OPE3
OPE2
OPE1
OPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
OPE0-3
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Page 300
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4RSTB (MFR)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
F
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05
AP No.
4
FUNCTION
SW-8: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW-8: OFF
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
1
2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
4
ON
ON
For make-busy No. 0 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 1 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 2 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 3 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
5
OFF
6
OFF
7
OFF
8
For normal operation
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 301
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4RSTC (CIR)
PN-4RSTC (CIR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
JP0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
BL0-3
Red
Remains lit when receiving a CALLER ID (CLASS SM) signal.
Page 302
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4RSTC (CIR)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
F
4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to
be set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
1
2
4
3
2
3
1
ON
4
For make-busy
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 0 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 1 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 2 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
ON
For make-busy No. 3 circuit
OFF
For normal operation
RIGHT
For normal operation
JP0
(Jumper pin)
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 303
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC00 (CCH)
PN-SC00 (CCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW0
LC
LPB
RS
TO MODEM
( FOR ANALOG INTERFACE)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the
common signalling channel data links connected.
LPB
Green
Remains lit when a loop-back test is in progress.
Page 304
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC00 (CCH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
AP No.
4
FUNCTION
SW0-4: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
Not used
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
For normal operation
ON
Loop-back test
OFF
For normal operation
ON
Analog interface
OFF
Digital interface
ON
RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM)
ON NOTE 3
OFF
RS-232C RTS signal (to MODEM)
OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1
OFF
4
For make-busy
2
3
2
1
ON
3
4
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 305
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC00 (CCH)
SWITCH
NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1(DIP SW)
ON
FUNCTION
• Common channel signalling data
transmission speed (For Digital
Interface)
ON
1
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
TRANSMISSION
SPEED
SW
1-1
SW
1-2
SW
1-3
SW
1-4
SW
1-5
OFF
48kbps NOTE 4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
48kbps NOTE4
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
56kbps
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
64kbps
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
2
ON
3
OFF
• Common channel signalling data
transmission speed (For Analog
Interface)
ON
4
OFF
ON
Set switches (SW1-1 - SW1-5) to
OFF.
5
OFF
ON
A-law
OFF
µ-law
7
OFF
Always set to OFF
8
OFF
Always set to OFF
6
CHECK
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 3: This setting is available when SW0-2 is set to ON (Analog Interface).
NOTE 4: The following two kinds of rate adaptation methods are available in 48 Kbps data transmission. The rate adaptation method must be set to match the rate adaptation of master office.
• SW1-3: ON
• SW1-3: OFF
48kbps
1
1
Data
Page 306
48kbps
1
1
Data
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC01 (DCH)
PN-SC01 (DCH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW1
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW0
LC
LPB
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
LC
Green
Remains lit when communications are normally ongoing with the
D channel data links connected.
LPB
Green
Not used
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 307
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC01 (DCH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
SW0-4: ON
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW0-4: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
4
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
A
D
E
F
For normal operation
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
1
C
For make-busy
1
2
B
Not used
UP
ON
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
4
ON
(Continued)
Page 308
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC01 (DCH)
SWITCH
NAME
SW1 (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
5
OFF
Always set to OFF
6
OFF
Always set to OFF
7
OFF
Always set to OFF
8
OFF
Always set to OFF
CHECK
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 309
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC03 (ICH)
PN-SC03 (ICH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
DOPE7
Green
Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE6
Green
Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE5
Green
Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE4
Green
Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE3
Green
Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE2
Green
Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE1
Green
Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE0
Green
Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.
Page 310
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC03 (ICH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
F
4
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
FUNCTION
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-15) to
be set by CM05.
AP No. 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
NOTE 1
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
ON
NOTE 2
Not used
UP
DOWN
For make-busy
For normal operation
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 311
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC03-A (CSH)
PN-SC03-A (CSH)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SENSE
RUN
MB
SW1
DOPE7
DOPE6
DOPE5
DOPE4
DOPE3
DOPE2
DOPE1
DOPE0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
RUN
Green
Flashes at 120 IPM while this card is operating normally.
DOPE7
Green
Remains lit when No. 7 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE6
Green
Remains lit when No. 6 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE5
Green
Remains lit when No. 5 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE4
Green
Remains lit when No. 4 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE3
Green
Remains lit when No. 3 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE2
Green
Remains lit when No. 2 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE1
Green
Remains lit when No. 1 circuit D channel link is connected.
DOPE0
Green
Remains lit when No. 0 circuit D channel link is connected.
Page 312
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-SC03-A (CSH)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SENSE
(Rotary SW)
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
4-F
AP No.
SW1-1: ON
04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
SW1-1: OFF 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
SW No.
NOTE 1
CHECK
Set the switch to match the AP Number (04-31) to
be set by CM05.
F
4
FUNCTION
0-3
MB (Toggle SW)
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Not used
UP
For make-busy
ON
DOWN
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano SW)
OFF
4
3
For normal operation
1
OFF
Not used
2
OFF
Not used
3
OFF
Not used
ON
AP No. 04-15
OFF
AP No. 20-31
2
1
4
ON
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 313
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FACE
SW
REAR
CONNR
CONNR: To CONN connector on
PN-CP14 (MP) or
PN-AP00-B (AP00)
Page 314
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Lamps Indications
This card has no lamps.
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW (DIP SW)
ON
1 2 3 4
FUNCTION
ON
For normal operation
(Memory backup ON)
OFF
Not used
(Memory backup OFF)
2
OFF
Not used
3
OFF
Not used
4
OFF
Not used
1
CHECK
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 315
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M537 (EXPMEM)
Mounting PZ-M537 Card
When mounting the EXPMEM card on the AP00/MP card, do the following procedure.
STEP 1: Take off three screws from the rear side of EXPMEM support.
NOTE: Supports and screws are attached to the EXPMEM card.
STEP 2: Connect the CONNR connector on the EXPMEM card and the CONN connector on the
AP00/MP card.
STEP 3: Secure the EXPMEM card to the AP00/MP card with three screws which taken by
STEP 1.
SUPPORT
EXPMEM CARD
WHEN MOUNTING EXPMEM CARD
ON THE AP00 CARD
WHEN MOUNTING EXPMEM CARD
ON THE MP CARD
CONNR CONNECTOR
CONNR CONNECTOR
EXPMEM CARD
AP00 CARD
CONN CONNECTOR
Page 316
EXPMEM CARD
MP CARD
CONN CONNECTOR
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M542 (CONN)
PZ-M542 (CONN)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
RCV21
JP1
FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT
JP0
TO CHAMP
CONNECTOR (MDF)
LTC
JP2
TRS21
RCV01
TRS11
FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT
RCV11
LT
TRS01
TO LTC CONNECTOR
ON BWB IN PIM
FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT
COAXIAL CONNECTOR
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 317
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M542 (CONN)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
JP0
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JP1
RIGHT
LEFT
JP2
RIGHT
LEFT
FUNCTION
CHECK
For coaxial connectors
(No. 0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No. 0 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No.1 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No.1 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No. 2 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No. 2 circuit)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Page 318
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M557 (CONN)
PZ-M557 (CONN)
JP1
JP0
TO CHAMP
CONNECTOR (MDF)
LTC
JP2
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
FOR
No.2
CIRCUIT
TRS20
RCV10
TRS10
FOR
No.0
CIRCUIT
RCV20
RCV00
FOR
No.1
CIRCUIT
LT
TO LTC CONNECTOR
ON BWB IN PIM
TRS00
COAXIAL CONNECTOR
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 319
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-M557 (CONN)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
JP0
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
RIGHT
LEFT
JP1
RIGHT
LEFT
JP2
RIGHT
LEFT
FUNCTION
CHECK
For coaxial connectors
(No. 0 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No. 0 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No. 1 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No. 1 circuit)
For coaxial connectors
(No. 2 circuit)
For champ connector
(LT connector) (No. 2 circuit)
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Page 320
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
Line/Trunk Card
LINE/TRUNK CARD
The table below shows the line/trunk cards to be explained in this section.
Table 3-3 List of Line/Trunk Cards
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
X: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-2AMPA (AMP)
X
–
X
Page 324
PN-AUCA (AUC)
X
–
X
Page 325
PN-CFTA (CFT)
X
–
X
Page 326
PN-CFTB (CFT)
X
–
X
Page 327
PN-2COTD (COT)
X
–
X
Page 328
PN-4COTA-A (COT)
X
–
X
Page 329
PN-4COTB (COT)
X
–
X
Page 330
PN-4COTE (COT)
X
–
X
Page 331
PN-4COTF (COT)
X
–
X
Page 332
PN-4COTG (COT)
X
–
X
Page 333
PN-6COTJ (COT)
X
–
X
Page 334
PN-8COTQ (COT)
X
–
X
Page 335
PN-8COTR (COT)
X
–
X
Page 336
PN-8COTS (COT)
X
–
X
Page 337
PN-8COTT (COT)
X
–
X
Page 338
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
X
–
X
Page 339
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
X
X
X
Page 342
PN-4DATC (DAT)
X
X
X
Page 345
*MB = Make Busy
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 321
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
Line/Trunk Card
Table 3-3 List of Line/Trunk Cards (Continued)
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
X: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-2DITA (DIT)
X
–
X
Page 346
PN-4DITB (DIT)
X
–
X
Page 347
PN-DK00 (DK)
–
–
X
Page 348
PN-2DLCB/2DLCN
(DLC)
X
–
X
Page 349
PN-2DLCC (DLC)
X
–
X
Page 350
PN-4DLCF (DLC)
X
–
X
Page 351
PN-4DLCM (DLC)
X
–
X
Page 352
PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
X
–
X
Page 353
PN-8DLCL (DLC)
X
–
X
Page 354
PN-8DLCP (DLC)
X
–
X
Page 355
PN-2DPCB (DPC)
X
X
X
Page 356
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
X
X
X
Page 360
PN-4LCC (LC)
X
–
X
Page 363
PN-4LCD-A (LC)
X
–
X
Page 364
PN-4LCE (LC)
X
–
X
Page 365
PN-4LCF (LC)
X
–
X
Page 366
PN-4LCK (LC)
X
–
X
Page 367
PN-4LCL (LC)
X
–
X
Page 368
PN-4LCV (LC)
X
–
X
Page 369
PN-4LCW (LC)
X
–
X
Page 370
PN-8LCAA (LC)
X
–
X
Page 371
*MB = Make Busy
Page 322
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
Line/Trunk Card
Table 3-3 List of Line/Trunk Cards (Continued)
NAME
(FUNCTIONAL
NAME)
LAMP
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
SWITCH
X: PROVIDED
–: NOT
PROVIDED
EXTRACTION/
INSERTION WITH
POWER ON
X: ALLOWED
: ALLOWED
AFTER MB*
–: NOT ALLOWED
REFERENCE
PAGE
PN-2LDTA (LDT)
X
–
X
Page 372
PN-M03 (M03)
X
X
X
Page 373
PN-M10 (M10)
X
X
PN-2ODTA (ODT)
X
–
X
Page 378
PN-2ODTB (ODT)
X
–
X
Page 379
PN-8RSTA (PBR)
–
–
X
Page 380
PN-TNTA (TNT)
–
X
X
Page 381
PN-4VCTH (VCT)
X
X
X
Page 383
PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
–
–
X
Page 385
PZ-VM00-M (VM)
X
X
PN-VM01 (VM)
X
X
Page 376
Page 386
–
Page 389
*MB = Make Busy
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 323
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2AMPA (AMP)
PN-2AMPA (AMP)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 324
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-AUCA (AUC)
PN-AUCA (AUC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
CN1
TO COT CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 325
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CFTA (CFT)
PN-CFTA (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when this card is in use.
• Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy
state on the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 326
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-CFTB (CFT)
PN-CFTB (CFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when this card is in use.
• Flashes (60 IPM) when the circuit on the card is in make-busy
state on the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 327
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2COTD (COT)
PN-2COTD (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
LF1
LF0
CN0
TO PN-AUCA CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0, 1
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0, 1
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a meter signal or a line fault condition.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 328
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4COTA-A (COT)
PN-4COTA-A (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
TO PN-AUCA CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 329
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4COTB (COT)
PN-4COTB (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
TO PN-AUCA CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 330
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4COTE (COT)
PN-4COTE (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0
CN1
TO PN-AUCA CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-3
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0-3
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault
condition.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 331
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4COTF (COT)
PN-4COTF (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
TO PN-AUCA CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 332
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4COTG (COT)
PN-4COTG (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
TO PN-AUCA CARD
FOR PFT CONNECTION
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 333
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-6COTJ (COT)
PN-6COTJ (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-5
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0-5
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault
condition.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 334
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8COTQ (COT)
PN-8COTQ (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 335
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8COTR (COT)
PN-8COTR (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 336
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8COTS (COT)
PN-8COTS (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 337
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8COTT (COT)
PN-8COTT (COT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
LF7
LF6
LF5
LF4
LF3
LF2
LF1
LF0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0-7
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
LF0-7
Red
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit detects a line fault
condition.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 338
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Swtiches, and Connectors
OPE
LB
B13
B12
B11
B10
B03
B02
B01
B00
DL1
DL0
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 339
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
LB
Red
Remains lit when a loop-back is in progress.
B13
Red
Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B12
Red
B channel status
ON
: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B11
Red
B channel status
ON
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B10
Red
B channel status
ON
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B03
Red
Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B02
Red
B channel status
ON
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
B01
Red
B channel status
ON
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
(Continued)
Page 340
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2CSIA (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
B00
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : ZT is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
ZT is in make-busy status.
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
DL0
(Rotary SW)
0
0
FUNCTION
CHECK
For normal operation
0-F
1-F
Not used
NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW)
0
0
For normal operation
0-F
1-F
Not used
NOTE
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 341
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
Locations of Lamps, Swtiches, and Connectors
OPE
LB
SP
B13
B12
B11
B10
B03
B02
B01
B00
DL1
DL0
Page 342
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
LB
Red
Remains lit when a loop-back is in progress.
B13
Red
Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B12
Red
B channel status
ON
: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B2 channel of the No. 1 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B11
Red
B channel status
ON
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B1 channel of the No. 1 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B10
Red
B channel status
ON
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B0 channel of the No. 1 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 1 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B03
Red
Not used (Flash [60 IPM])
B02
Red
B channel status
ON
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B2 channel of the No. 0 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
B01
Red
B channel status
ON
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B1 channel of the No. 0 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 343
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2CSIA-A (CSI)
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
B00
Red
FUNCTION
B channel status
ON
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is in use.
OFF
: B0 channel of the No. 0 circuit is idle.
Flash (60 IPM) : CS is not connected to the No. 0 circuit.
CS is in make-busy status.
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
DL0
(Rotary SW)
0
0
FUNCTION
CHECK
For normal operation
0-F
1-F
Not used
NOTE
DL1
(Rotary SW)
0
0
For normal operation
0-F
1-F
Not used
UP
For normal operation
NOTE
SP (jumper SW)
1
2
3
Front
DOWN
Not used
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
Page 344
Set the groove on the switch to the desired position.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4DATC (DAT)
PN-4DATC (DAT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 345
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DITA (DIT)
PN-2DITA (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 346
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4DITB (DIT)
PN-4DITB (DIT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 347
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-DK00 (DK)
PN-DK00 (DK)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 348
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN (DLC)
PN-2DLCB/PN-2DLCN (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
CN0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 349
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DLCC (DLC)
PN-2DLCC (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 350
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4DLCF (DLC)
PN-4DLCF (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 351
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4DLCM (DLC)
PN-4DLCM (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 352
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
PN-4DLCQ (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 353
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8DLCL (DLC)
PN-8DLCL (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 354
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8DLCP (DLC)
PN-8DLCP (DLC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 355
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DPCB (DPC)
PN-2DPCB (DPC)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
RSC1
SDT1
RDR1
CDI1
RSC0
SDT0
RDR0
CDI0
BL1
LB11
LB12
BL0
LB01
LB02
SW1
SW0
XCN1
XCN0
RS1
To X.21 DTE/DCE
or PN-M03
To V.24/V.28 DTE/DCE
RS0
Page 356
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DPCB (DPC)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL0
Red
No. 0
Circuit
ON: Ready for digital data transmission or the circuit is busy.
OFF: Fixed path is not connected.
Flash (60 IPM): Make-busy state or the system
data for this card is not assigned.
Flash (120 IPM): Fixed path is connected.
LB01
Red
ON: Loop Back 1 is set.
OFF: Normally operating.
LB02
Red
ON: Loop Back 2 is set.
OFF: Normally operating.
RSC0
Green
ON: RTS/C signal ON
OFF: RTS/C signal OFF
SDT0
Green
ON: TXD/T signal is “0”.
OFF: TXD/T signal is “1”.
RDR0
Green
ON: RXD/R signal is “0”.
OFF: RXD/R signal is “1”.
CDI0
Green
ON: DCD/I signal ON
OFF: DCD/I signal OFF
(Continued)
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 357
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DPCB (DPC)
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
BL1
Red
No. 1
Circuit
ON: Ready for digital data transmission or the circuit is busy.
OFF: Fixed path is not connected.
Flash (60 IPM): Make-busy state or the system
data for this card is not assigned.
Flash (120 IPM): Fixed path is connected.
LB11
Red
ON: Loop Back 1 is set.
OFF: Normally operating.
LB12
Red
ON: Loop Back 2 is set.
OFF: Normally operating.
RSC1
Green
ON: RTS/C signal ON
OFF: RTS/C signal OFF
SDT1
Green
ON: TXD/T signal is “0”.
OFF: TXD/T signal is “1”.
RDR1
Green
ON: RXD/R signal is “0”.
OFF: RXD/R signal is “1”.
CDI1
Green
ON: DCD/I signal ON
OFF: DCD/I signal OFF
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
1
OFF
2
4
3
2
3
1
ON
4
No. 0
Circuit
Loop Back 1 OFF
Loop Back 2 ON
OFF
Loop Back 2 OFF
ON
No. 1
Circuit
CHECK
Loop Back 1 ON
ON
OFF
ON
FUNCTION
Loop Back 1 ON
Loop Back 1 OFF
ON
Loop Back 2 ON
OFF
Loop Back 2 OFF
(Continued)
Page 358
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2DPCB (DPC)
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW0 (DIP SW)
ON
1
ON
FUNCTION
No. 0
Circuit
CHECK
Forcibly turning the DTR
signal to ON
OFF
The DTR signal from DTE
goes through the card
ON
Forcibly turning the RTS/C
signal to ON
OFF
The RTS/C signal from
DTE goes through the
card
OFF
Not used
ON
V.11 (X.21) interface
OFF
V.24/V.28 (RS-232C)
interface
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
3
4
ON
5
8
Forcibly turning the DTR
signal to ON
OFF
The DTR signal from DTE
goes through the card
ON
Forcibly turning the RTS/C
signal to ON
OFF
The RTS/C signal from
DTE goes through the
card
OFF
Not used
ON
V.11 (X.21) interface
OFF
V.24/V.28 (RS-232C)
interface
6
7
No. 1
Circuit
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
When the power is on, disconnect the cables before unplugging the circuit card and
connect the cables after plugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 359
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
ACT1
PAL1
LPB1
B21
B11
ACT0
PAL0
LPB0
B20
B10
SW1
SW0
Page 360
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
ACT1
Green
No.1
Circuit
PAL1
Red
ON: Line is short-circuiting.
OFF: Normally operating.
LPB1
Red
OFF: Not used.
B21
Green
ON: B2 channel is in use.
OFF: B2 channel is idle.
B11
Green
ON: B1 channel is in use.
OFF: B1 channel is idle.
ACT0
Green
PAL0
Red
ON: Line is short-circuiting.
OFF: Normally operating.
LPB0
Red
OFF: Not used
B20
Green
ON: B2 channel is in use.
OFF: B2 channel is idle.
B10
Green
ON: B1 channel is in use.
OFF: B1 channel is idle.
No. 0
Circuit
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
ON: Normally operating.
OFF: Not operating.
ON: Normally operating.
OFF: Not operating.
Page 361
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2ILCA (ILC)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
OFF
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Always set to OFF
3
OFF
Always set to OFF
4
OFF
Always set to OFF
CHECK
4
3
2
1
ON
SW0
(Piano Key SW)
ON
1
OFF
OFF
No.0
Terminating register is
Circuit
provided.
(Receiving) Terminating register is
not provided.
4
3
ON
2
2
1
No.0
Circuit
(Sending)
OFF
ON
ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
Terminating register is
provided.
Terminating register is
not provided.
No.1
Terminating register is
Circuit
provided.
(Receiving) Terminating register is
not provided.
No.1
Circuit
(Sending)
Terminating register is
provided.
Terminating register is
not provided.
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Page 362
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCC (LC)
PN-4LCC (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 363
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCD-A (LC)
PN-4LCD-A (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 364
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCE (LC)
PN-4LCE (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 365
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCF (LC)
PN-4LCF (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 366
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCK (LC)
PN-4LCK (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 367
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCL (LC)
PN-4LCL (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 368
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCV (LC)
PN-4LCV (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 369
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4LCW (LC)
PN-4LCW (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 370
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8LCAA (LC)
PN-8LCAA (LC)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL7
BL6
BL5
BL4
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 371
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2LDTA (LDT)
PN-2LDTA (LDT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 372
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-M03 (M03)
PN-M03 (M03)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
OPRS
OPER
SW0
OPSD
OPE
RS
SD
RD
CD
ER
DR
CS
SELX21
X21
To PN-2DPCB
SELCN0
CN0
JP1B
V35
To V.35 DTE/DCE
JP1A
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 373
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-M03 (M03)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
OPE
Green
ON: This card is normally connected to the PN-2DPCB.
OFF: This card is abnormally connected to the PN-2DPCB.
RS
Green
ON: RTS signal is ON.
OFF: RTS signal is OFF.
SD
Green
ON: TXD signal is “0” (Space condition).
OFF: TXD signal is “1” (Mark condition).
RD
Green
ON: RXD signal is “0” (Space condition).
OFF: RXD signal is “1” (Mark condition).
CD
Green
ON: DCD signal is ON.
OFF: DCD signal is OFF.
ER
Green
ON: DTR signal is ON.
OFF: DTR signal is OFF.
DR
Green
ON: DSR signal is ON.
OFF: DSR signal is OFF.
CS
Green
ON: CTS signal is ON.
OFF: CTS signal is OFF.
SELX21
Green
ON: Connecting to the PN-2DPCB is available.
OFF: Connecting to the PN-2DPCB is not available.
SELCN0
Green
Not used
Page 374
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-M03 (M03)
Switch Settings
SWITCH
NAME
SW0 (DIP SW)
2 1
ON
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
FUNCTION
1
OFF
Always set to OFF
2
OFF
Not used
Right
TXC(2) signal is sent out.
Left
TXC(2) signal is inputted.
Right
TXC(2) signal is sent out.
Left
TXC(2) signal is inputted.
JP1A (Jumper pin)
NOTE
JP1B (Jumper pin)
NOTE
OPSD
(Jumper pin)
OPRS
(Jumper pin)
OPER
(Jumper pin)
Right
Set the function of extending distance for TXD signal.
Left
Cancel the function of extending
distance for TXD signal.
Right
Set the function of extending distance for RTS signal.
Left
Cancel the function of extending
distance for RTS signal.
Right
Set the function of extending distance for DTR signal.
Left
Cancel the function of extending
distance for DTR signal.
CHECK
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE:
The JP1A and JP1B must be set to the same position each other.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 375
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-M10 (M10)
PN-M10 (M10)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
JP3
JP4
CN1
JP1
JP0
CK0
CK1
TALM
RALM
TO OPTICAL CABLE
JP2
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
CK0
Green
Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 0
circuit on this card.
CK1
Green
Remains lit when a Digital Trunk Interface is connected to No. 1
circuit on this card.
TALM
Red
Remains lit when optical output is stopped.
RALM
Red
Remains lit when optical input is lost or stopped.
Page 376
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-M10 (M10)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
JP0, 1
(Jumper pin)
UP
When connected to E1 (2M) Digital
Trunk Interface.
DOWN
When connected to T1 (1.5M) Digital Trunk Interface.
Right
Line code: B8ZS* is provided
(For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight zero Substitution
Left
Line code: B8ZS* is not provide
(For T1 interface)
*B8ZS: Bipolar Eight zero Substitution
Right
When connected to E1 (2M) Digital
Trunk Interface.
Left
When connected to T1 (1.5M) Digital Trunk Interface.
UP
When connected to E1 (2M) Digital
Trunk Interface.
DOWN
When connected to T1 (1.5M) Digital Trunk Interface.
JP2 (Jumper pin)
JP3 (Jumper pin)
JP4 (Jumper pin)
FUNCTION
CHECK
NOTE 1: Set the groove on the switch to the desired position
NOTE 2: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 377
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2ODTA (ODT)
PN-2ODTA (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 378
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-2ODTB (ODT)
PN-2ODTB (ODT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL1
BL0
CN1
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0, 1
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 379
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-8RSTA (PBR)
PN-8RSTA (PBR)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
Page 380
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-TNTA (TNT)
PN-TNTA (TNT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
SW
JACK1
JACK0
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 381
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-TNTA (TNT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW
(Piano Key SW)
SWITCH NUMBER
1
2
1, 2
3
CHECK
Volume adjustment for No.0 circuit
OFF
4
FUNCTION
2
1
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
VOLUME
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
–10dB
–7dB
–4dB
–1dB
Volume adjustment for No.1 circuit
SWITCH NUMBER
3
4
3, 4
Page 382
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
VOLUME
–10dB
–7dB
–4dB
–1dB
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4VCTH (VCT)
PN-4VCTH (VCT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
BL3
BL2
BL1
BL0
SW1
IPT
FROM PN-IPTA CONNECTOR OR
FROM OTHER PN-4VCTH CARD
CONNECTOR
EXP
TO IPT CONNECTOR OF OTHER
PN-4VCTH CARD
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
BL0-3
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 383
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PN-4VCTH (VCT)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
FUNCTION
Set the number per VCT card if two or more VCT
cards are used. (Max. four VCT cards)
OFF
SW No.
4
1, 2
3
CHECK
2
1
ON
3
1
2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
4
ON
OFF
Card No.
0
1
2
3
Not used
Not used
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
in the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
Page 384
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
PZ-8PFTB (PFT)
Locations of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PFT1
PFT0
Lamp Indications
This card has no lamps.
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 385
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-VM00-M (VM)
PZ-VM00-M (VM)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
• CPU Board (Top Side)
CPU Board (top side)
RXD
TXD
MOD
RI
COM2
VM00-M Card
SW1-4
SW1-1
COM1
HDD
BIOS
Internal modem
• DSP Board (Bottom Side)
VM00-M Card
DSP Board (bottom side)
BL7
BL0
SWP
MB
DSP
PL3
PL0
RST
CN3 (VM01 Card Slot)
Page 386
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-VM00-M (VM)
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
COLOR
FUNCTION
CPU RXD
Board TXD
Green
Not used
Red
Not used
MOD
Green
Not used
RI
Red
Incoming call
HDD
Red
Accessing to the HDD
–
Built-in hard disk is faulty
Red
BIOS programming is in operation
–
DOS mode has been activated
BIOS
DSP BL0-7 Red
Board
• Remains lit when the corresponding circuit is in use.
• Flashes at 60 IPM when the corresponding circuit is in makebusy state or the system data for this card is not assigned.
SWP
Red
30 seconds after the MB switch is turned ON (upward) (The circuit card can be plugged/unplugged while this pilot lamp is on.)
DSP
Green/
Flashing
According to voice mail application program in use.
Red/
Flashing
PL0-3 Red
DSP circuit operating
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 387
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-VM00-M (VM)
Switch Settings
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SETTING
NUMBER POSITION
MB (Toggle SW)
UP
ON
DOWN
NOTE 1
RST (Toggle SW)
FUNCTION
CHECK
For make-busy
For normal operation
Push when starting up this card, after MB switch is
set to DOWN position.
NOTE 2
SW1
(Piano Key SW)
ON
BIOS Redirect Utility (Key board)
NOTE 3
OFF
Normal Operation
ON
BIOS Redirect Utility (Floppy Drive)
NOTE 3
OFF
Normal Operation
ON
COM2: Use internal modem for
remote maintenance
OFF
COM2: RS-232C (For local direct
connection to maintenance console)
OFF
Not used
1
OFF
4
3
2
2
1
ON
NOTE 2
3
4
The figure in the SWITCH NAME column and the position in
the SETTING POSITION
column indicate the standard setting of the switch. When the switch is not set as shown by the
figure and
, the setting of the switch varies with the system concerned.
NOTE 1: When the power is on, flip the MB switch to ON (UP position) before plugging/unplugging the circuit card.
NOTE 2: When SW1 settings have changed, RST switch must be pushed.
NOTE 3: Use BIOS Redirect only when assisted by NEC.
Page 388
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
CHAPTER 3 LAMP INDICATIONS AND SWITCH SETTINGS
PZ-VM01 (VM)
PZ-VM01 (VM)
Location of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors
PL7
VM01 Card (on VM00 DSP Board)
PL4
Lamp Indications
LAMP
NAME
PL4-7
COLOR
Red
FUNCTION
DSP circuit operating
Switch Settings
This card has no switches.
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Page 389
This page is for your notes.
Page 390
NEAX2000 IVS2 Installation Procedure Manual
ND-70928 (E), Issue 1.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement